JP2022144365A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving an amusement of a performance using a specific image.SOLUTION: A game machine is configured so that: special performance execution means displays a specific corresponding image when a suggestive performance is executed, and executes a special performance in a mode in which the specific image acts with respect to the specific corresponding image; suggestive performance execution means can execute a performance in which, the means lowers visibility of performance identification information being different from specific performance identification information, to a first low visibility state by display of an effect display, then, lowers the visibility thereof to a second low visibility state in which the visibility is lower than that in the first low visibility state; reporting performance execution means can execute a performance which makes performance identification information being different from the specific performance identification information invisible; and suggestive performance execution means can execute the suggestive performance even when the specific performance identification information is not stopped temporarily, and if the information is not stopped temporarily, in a prescribed period after specific timing, the effect display can be continuously displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-15

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player.

As disclosed in Patent Document 1, as a gaming machine, a shooting device shoots game balls, which are game media, into a game area. prize balls are paid out to the player. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuation”) identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is a specific display result, the game state (game There is a so-called pachinko machine configured to change the state of the machine (ie, more specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) to give a predetermined game value to the player. As shown in Patent Document 2, it is possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns (effect identification information), and to re-variably display temporary stop of pseudo-continuous patterns (specific effect identification information) during variable display of the decorative patterns. (For example, refer to Patent Document 3).

The game value is defined as the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine that is advantageous to the player who is likely to win the ball, or the state that is advantageous to the player. It is to generate a right or to be in a state in which the conditions for paying out prize balls are likely to be established.

In a pachinko game machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole. If you do, a "jackpot" will occur. It should be noted that the derivation display means that the symbol (final stop symbol) is finally stopped and displayed. When a big win occurs, for example, the big win opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big win game state in which the ball is likely to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning opening is closed. The number of openings of the big winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed after the opening time has elapsed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning slot may be called a round. Moreover, the game in a round may be called a round game.

In addition, in the variable display device, patterns other than the final stop pattern (for example, the middle pattern among the left, middle, and right patterns) continue for a predetermined period of time and are stopped and shaken in a state in which they match a specific display result. Big wins can occur before the final result is displayed due to moving, scaling, or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols changing. The production performed in the state where the sexuality is continuing (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is called the reach production. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach state. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the pattern variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a game machine, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects that are controlled in an advantageous state and that have different expectations depending on the mode of effect, and expect the suggestive effects using the displayed special images. There are some that change to a high performance mode. For example, Patent Literature 1 describes that a pseudo consecutive notice effect, a development destination notice effect, or an active suspension notice effect is executed by a present image displayed by opening a present box of the same mode. Further, for example, in Patent Document 2, by displaying information on the stock of accessories on the screen, it is possible to inform the player that an effect in which the movable body falls will be executed later as a strong advance notice effect. Have been described.

JP 2015-134097 A Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-50980 JP 2016-131876 A

However, there is still room for improving the marketability of the game machines having the functions and configurations of Patent Documents 1-3.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with enhanced marketability.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous patterns) are variably displayed to derive and display display results, and an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
As the variable display, a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 18);
A first suggesting effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is performing a variable display shown in FIG. The part that executes the production process) and
A notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
In addition to suggesting that it will be controlled to an advantageous state, there are multiple types of second suggestive effects with different expectations depending on the mode of presentation (for example, a title display in a predetermined mode, and an active display in a predetermined mode). a second suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a display effect, a dialogue effect of displaying a dialogue display in a predetermined manner, a decorative pattern effect of displaying a decorative pattern in a predetermined manner, etc.;
a special image display effect executing means capable of displaying a special image (for example, a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12);
By using the displayed special image, a special effect (for example, display of active display) that changes a suggestive effect being executed in one effect mode to a effect mode with a higher degree of expectation than the one effect mode a special effect executing means capable of executing a chance-up effect of changing the color from normal color (white) to blue;
with
The first suggesting effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identifying information different from the specific effect identifying information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the first suggesting effect, and then It is possible to execute an effect that lowers the visibility to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-33 and 19-34, the concentration line is displayed at a density of D1 to reduce the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns, and then the central lines are displayed at a density of D2 to further reduce the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns),
The notification effect execution means is capable of executing, as the notification effect, an effect in which effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information is rendered invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-34 and 19-35 , a portion where the left and right decoration patterns are rendered invisible by displaying the effect image for notifying the temporary stop in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the first suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect is maintained for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. The display can be continuously displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the pseudo continuous symbols are not displayed on the image display device 5). The part where the saturated lines continue to be displayed even after
The special effect executing means displays a special corresponding image (for example, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11) while the second suggestive effect is being executed, and the special image acts on the special corresponding image. Execute a special effect (for example, display a keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH or decoration pattern, and execute a chance-up effect in such a manner that the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is stuck with the key image 030IWG12. 8-15 (9) to (15), FIGS. 8-17 (9) to 8-18 (17), etc.).
According to such a configuration, when a special effect using a special image is executed, the story related to the special image can be imparted to enhance the effect of the effect, thereby improving interest. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and to increase the excitement of the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and when the temporary stop is not performed, To make it easier for a player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made and to relieve the player's disappointment about the fact that the temporary stop was not made by continuously displaying the effect display even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop. Therefore, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game and enhance the marketability.
In another aspect, a game in which a plurality of types of performance identification information (for example, decoration patterns) are variably displayed to derive and display display results, and which can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) for the player. A machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1),
As the variable display, special identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed. a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 18) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) for restarting the variable display later;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a first suggestive effect (for example, temporary stop suggestive effect) suggesting that the special identification information will temporarily stop part to execute) and
A notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
In addition to suggesting that it will be controlled to an advantageous state, there are multiple types of second suggestive effects with different expectations depending on the mode of presentation (for example, a title display in a predetermined mode, and an active display in a predetermined mode). a second suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a display effect, a dialogue effect of displaying a dialogue display in a predetermined manner, a decorative pattern effect of displaying a decorative pattern in a predetermined manner, etc.;
a special image display effect executing means capable of displaying a special image (for example, a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12);
By using the displayed special image, a special effect (for example, display of active display) that changes a suggestive effect being executed in one effect mode to a effect mode with a higher degree of expectation than the one effect mode a special effect executing means capable of executing a chance-up effect of changing the color from normal color (white) to blue;
with
The first suggestive effect executing means, as the first suggestive effect, temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information to the first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then lowers the visibility of the effect identification information to the first low visibility state. Furthermore, it is possible to execute an effect that lowers the visibility to a second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. After reducing the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by doing so, the part where the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines with a density of D2),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect that makes the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-34 and 19-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The first suggesting effect executing means can execute the first suggesting effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and if the temporary stop does not occur, the predetermined period after the predetermined timing The effect display can be continuously displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop, the pseudo consecutive symbols are not displayed on the image display device 5). The part where the concentration line continues to be displayed even after becoming),
The special effect executing means displays a special corresponding image (for example, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11) while the second suggestive effect is being executed, and the special image acts on the special corresponding image. Execute a special effect (for example, display a keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH or decoration pattern, and execute a chance-up effect in such a manner that the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is stuck with the key image 030IWG12. 8-15 (9) to (15), FIGS. 8-17 (9) to 8-18 (17), etc.).
According to such a configuration, when a special effect using a special image is executed, the story related to the special image can be imparted to enhance the effect of the effect, thereby improving interest. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestion effect, and to increase the excitement of the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and when the temporary stop is not performed, To make it easier for a player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made and to relieve the player's disappointment about the fact that the temporary stop was not made by continuously displaying the effect display even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop. As a result, the amusement of the game can be improved, and the marketability can be enhanced.
The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the big-hit determination table in characteristic part 030IW, and a variation pattern table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a configuration of a variation pattern and a breakdown of variation time; It is a timing chart showing the execution timing of each effect during the super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution time of each production|presentation in a super reach first half part and a second half part. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stock effect pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a chance up production|presentation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a title display change pattern determination table, an active display change pattern determination table, a dialogue display change pattern determination table, and a decoration symbol change pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of stock effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of stock effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another specific example of stock effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the first half and second half of super reach. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the first half and second half of super reach. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect for active display; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect for active display; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production|presentation which targets a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production|presentation which targets a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production|presentation which targets a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of chance up fanning production (false). FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a keyhole (suggestion) image and a keyhole (substantial) image for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a jackpot in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of loss with a time saving. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows operation|movement of a 2nd movable body. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. (A) is a flow chart showing an example of a winning random number value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of a variable category command. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for pending storage of a big hit, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for pending storage of a loss. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing; FIG. 11 is a timing chart of variable display for executing pseudo-continuous effects; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart of variable display for executing pseudo-continuous effects; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart of variable display for executing pseudo-continuous effects; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart of variable display for executing pseudo-continuous effects; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart of variable display for executing pseudo-continuous effects; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of each effect period and effect contents in the pseudo-continuous effect; (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the announcement effect determination process (for execution of pseudo continuous effect), and (B) is a diagram showing whether or not the announcement effect is executed and the decision ratio of the announcement effect to be executed. (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the announcement effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo-continuous effect), and (B) is a diagram showing whether or not the announcement effect is executed and the decision ratio of the announcement effect to be executed. (A) is a diagram showing a special temporary stop notification effect execution determination ratio, and (B) is a diagram showing a temporary stop notification effect period determination ratio. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an output mode of sound output from a speaker; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a display mode of each image during a temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo consecutive symbols are not stopped; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of each image during a temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; It is explanatory drawing of the change of the visibility of the decoration design on either side in the temporary stop suggestion production|presentation period and the temporary stop notification production|presentation period. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in a variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect in a modified example; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes display on an image display device; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of image data forming a display on an image display device in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in a variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in a variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in a variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in a variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the transparency of a saturated line and an effect image in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image display device in a variable display that executes a pseudo-continuous effect in a modified example;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 030IW)
Next, the characterizing portion 030IW of this embodiment will be described.

(jackpot determination table)
FIG. 8-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a big hit determination table and a variation pattern table. Among them, FIG. 8-1(A) is an example of a big hit determination table used in the characteristic portion 030IW. As shown in FIG. 8-1(A), in this example, based on the hit determination random number, it is determined that the jackpot will be awarded with a probability of about 1/300 in the low probability state, and about 1/300 in the high probability state. It is determined to be a big hit with a probability of 1/30.

In addition, not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), for example, depending on whether it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol or the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol , may have different jackpot probabilities.

Further, for example, it is configured to be able to set to one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. If it is possible to check the set value of or change the set value, the big hit probability may differ depending on which set value is set.

Also, a plurality of jackpot types may be provided, each having a different advantage. Specifically, according to the jackpot type, the number of rounds in the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game may differ. In this case, when it is determined to be a big win based on the random number for winning determination, the type of the big win is determined based on the random number for determining the type.

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 8-1(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 030IW. Among them, FIG. 8-1(B) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for loss. Also, FIG. 8-1(C) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for big wins. The variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 8-1(B) and (C) are both used in the low-probability state. A variation pattern table (not shown) having different ratios of determination values may be used in the high-probability state and the high-base state.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the case of deviation, the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), variation pattern PA1-2 (shortening variation), variation pattern PA2 -1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach A), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach B), variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach A (with chance up)) and variation pattern PA2-5 ( Super reach B (with chance up)) is determined.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (C), in the case of a big hit, the variation pattern is a variation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), a variation pattern PB2-2 (super reach A), a variation pattern PB2-3 (super reach B), variation pattern PB2-4 (super reach A (with chance up)) and variation pattern PB2-5 (super reach B (with chance up)) is determined.

In this example, during the super reach after the reach is established, the stock effect of stocking the item (key in this example) and the effect of another effect using the stocked item (key) are changed (that is, the other effect It is configured to be able to execute a chance-up effect that increases the expectation of a big hit suggested by With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during the super reach, and to increase the expectation for the stock effect and the chance-up effect. Hereinafter, executing the chance-up effect using the stocked item (key) is also referred to as releasing the stocked item (key).

In this example, super ready-to-win is a series of performances unfolded after ready-to-win is established. When the effect control is performed based on the variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB2-2, and PB2-3 in which the chance-up effect (and the stock effect) are not executed, during the super reach, the outpost of the battle effect. There are two parts, namely, a super ready-to-win first half part A in which a prelude effect is executed, and a super ready-to-win second half part in which a battle effect is executed. Further, when the effect control is performed based on the variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB2-4, PB2-5 in which the chance-up effect (and the stock effect) is executed, the stock effect is executed during the super reach. There are three parts: a super ready-to-win introduction part in which is executed, a super ready-to-win first half part B in which a chance-up effect is executed together with a sentry effect, and a super ready-to-win second half part in which a battle effect is executed. With such a configuration, during the period before the start of the battle production where the excitement of Super Reach reaches its climax, the stock production and the chance-up production are executed, so it is possible to gradually increase the production and enhance the production effect. can.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 (B) and (C), the super reach in which the chance-up effect (and stock effect) is executed is the super reach in which the chance-up effect (and stock effect) is not executed. The degree of expectation for big hit is higher than that of reach, and the degree of expectation for big hit is higher in super reach B than in super reach A. - 特許庁With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the chance-up effect (and the stock effect) will be executed and in which super reach it will be executed.

In addition to the example shown in FIG. 8-1, for example, a variation pattern is provided in which a pseudo-continuous effect is performed once or more times before the super reach, and the degree of expectation for a big hit differs according to the number of times of the pseudo-continuous effect. You may do so.

Next, the configuration of each variation pattern will be described. FIG. 8-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the structure of the variation pattern and the breakdown of the variation time. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the elements that make up the variation pattern (which can be said to be an effect executed in the variation pattern) are "normal variation" that performs variable display in a normal manner, and ``Shortened variation'' that performs variable display in a shortened manner, ``Normal reach'' that performs normal reach as a reach effect, and ``Super reach introduction (stock effect)'' that performs a stock effect in the super reach introduction part as a reach effect, "Super reach first half A (no chance-up effect)" in which super reach first half part A has a forward appearance, and "super reach first half B (with chance-up effect)" in which super reach first half part B performs a guard effect and chance up effect. And, there is a "super reach second half (battle production)" in which the battle production is performed in the second half of the super reach, and a "blessing production at the time of winning" in which a blessing production is performed to celebrate the big hit. It should be noted that the example shown in FIG. 8B is not the only example, and other elements such as an element that performs a pseudo continuous effect may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 is a fluctuation pattern that is not normal fluctuation, and includes "normal fluctuation" (15 seconds) as an element constituting the fluctuation pattern, and the total fluctuation time is 15 seconds. In addition, the variation pattern PA1-2 is a variation pattern that will not be shortened variation, includes "shortened variation" (5 seconds) as an element constituting the variation pattern, and the total variation time is 5 seconds.

Also, the variation pattern PA2-1 is a variation pattern that is lost after normal reach, and includes "normal reach" (20 seconds) as an element constituting the variation pattern, and the total variation time is 20 seconds.

In addition, the variation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3 are variation patterns that are lost after passing through the super reach first half part A in which the chance-up effect is not executed and the super reach second half part, and the elements constituting the variation pattern are " The total variable time is 70 seconds including the first half of super reach A (no chance-up effect)” (30 seconds) and the second half of super reach (battle effect)” (40 seconds).

In addition, the variation patterns PA2-4 and PA2-5 are variation patterns that are lost through the super reach introduction part, the super reach first half part B in which the chance-up effect is executed, and the super reach second half part. The elements that make up the pattern are "super reach introduction (stock production)" (30 seconds), "super reach first half B (with chance up production)" (40 seconds), and "super reach second half (battle production)" (40 seconds). seconds), and the total variation time is 110 seconds.

In addition, the variation pattern PB2-1 is a variation pattern that changes from normal reach to a big hit, and includes "normal reach" (20 seconds) and "blessing effect at the time of winning" (20 seconds) as elements constituting the variation pattern. The variation time is 40 seconds.

In addition, the variation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 are variation patterns that become a big hit after going through a super reach first half part A in which the chance-up effect is not executed and a super reach second half part. Total variable time including super reach first half A (no chance up effect)” (30 seconds), “super reach second half (battle effect)” (40 seconds), and “blessing effect when winning” (20 seconds) is 90 seconds.

In addition, the variation patterns PB2-4 and PB2-5 are variation patterns that result in a big hit after passing through a super reach introduction part, a super reach first half part B in which a chance-up effect is executed, and a super reach second half part. The elements that make up the pattern are "super reach introduction (stock production)" (30 seconds), "super reach first half B (with chance up production)" (40 seconds), and "super reach second half (battle production)" (40 seconds). seconds) and the “blessing effect at the time of winning” (20 seconds), and the total variable time is 130 seconds.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-2, the super reach A and the super reach B have the same performance time for the first half of the super reach and the second half of the super reach. The rendering time may be different depending on the type.

(Execution timing of each production during Super Reach)
Next, the execution timing of the stock effect and the chance-up effect will be described. FIG. 8-3 is a timing chart showing an example of execution timing of each effect.

In this example, the variation time (that is, the total performance execution time) is determined by the variation pattern determined on the main board 11 side, and the performance control board 12 side determines the stock performance and the chance-up performance execution timing based on the variation pattern. Or, the performance execution time is determined. However, although the details will be described later, depending on the type of effect, the execution timing may be predetermined corresponding to the variation pattern. In addition, not limited to the configuration of this example, a variation pattern in which the performance timing and the performance execution time of the stock effect and the chance up effect are predetermined is provided, and the main board 11 side determines one of the variation patterns. may

FIG. 8-3(A) shows a case where super reach without chance up is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-3(A), the outpost effect is executed in the first half part A of super reach, and the battle effect is executed in the second half part of super reach.

FIG. 8-3(B) shows a case where super reach with chance up is executed. In this case, the stock effect is first executed in the super reach introduction part. Then, in the super ready-to-win first half part B, the chance-up effect is executed together with the outpost effect. Then, the battle effect is executed in the second half of the super reach.

As shown in FIG. 8-3(B), in this example, at maximum three timings of timings A to C during the stock effect (timings (A) to (C) shown in FIG. 8-3(B)) There is an opportunity to stock items (keys). In this example, a maximum of 3 timings are provided as opportunities to stock items (keys) in the stock effect, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. There may be.

Also, in this example, in the first half of Super Reach, the title display (effect to display the title display), the active display (effect to display the active display), the dialogue display (effect to display the dialogue display), and the decoration pattern ( The "decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern" means that the degree of expectation for a big hit indicated by each effect mode differs, and when the corresponding chance-up effect is executed, the mode of effect changes (that is, the degree of expectation for a big win suggested increases). is configured as

Specifically, when one item (key) is stocked in the stock effect, title display (effect to display title display), active display (effect to display active display), dialogue display (effect to display dialogue) A chance-up effect targeting either the dialogue effect to be displayed) or a decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect to display the decorative pattern) is executed once, and two items (keys) are stocked in the stock effect. , Title display (effect to display the title display), active display (effect to display the active display), dialogue display (effect to display the dialogue display), decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect to display the decorative pattern) A chance-up effect is executed once for each of the two targets, and when three items (keys) are stocked in the stock effect, the title display (effect to display the title display), active display (display active display) A chance-up effect is executed once for each of three of 3 of the following: a line display (a line effect of displaying a line display), and a decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect of displaying a decorative pattern). Note that the configuration is not limited to this example, and the chance-up effect may be executed a plurality of times for one effect. In this case, the stocked items (keys) are released each time the chance-up effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), in this example, the first to fifth timings ((1) shown in FIG. 8-3 (B)) are the timings at which the chance-up effect can be executed in the first half of the super reach. to (5)) are provided. In this example, the first to fifth timings in the first half of Super Reach are determined for each variation pattern (or each type of Super Reach), but are common to any variation pattern (or type of Super Reach). may be the timing of

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. ) can be executed at the second timing or the fourth timing, and the chance-up effect for dialogue display (dialogue production to display dialogue display) can be executed at the third timing , and the chance-up effect for decorative symbols (decorative symbol effect for displaying decorative symbols) is configured to be executable at the fifth timing.

At which of the second timing and the fourth timing the chance-up effect for the active display (the effect for displaying the active display) is to be executed is determined by a lottery. On the other hand, the timing at which the chance-up effect for title display (effect to display the title display), dialogue display (effect to display the dialogue display) or decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect to display the decorative pattern) is executed is fixedly determined for each variation pattern. It should be noted that, without being limited to such a configuration, the timing at which the chance-up effect for the active display (the effect for displaying the active display) is executed may be fixedly determined, or the title display may be performed. (Direction to display title display), Dialogue display (Direction to display dialogue display) or Decorative pattern (Decorative pattern effect to display decorative pattern) Either one of them may be determined by lottery.

Note that the execution order of the effects that are targets of the chance-up effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-3, and may be another order. However, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for a big win is likely to be improved by the chance-up performance (for example, the degree of expectation for a big win is likely to be changed to a performance mode with a high degree of expectation for a big win) as the order of targets for the chance-up performance becomes later. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the timing at which the chance-up effect is executed, and the game with expectations for the changing timing (for example, expectations increased as the first half of the super reach progressed). It is possible to prevent disappointing people.

In addition, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed during the super reach, the stock effect is always executed. There may also be a pattern in which the chance-up effect is executed without the game. In the case of such a configuration, for example, a variation pattern including a stock effect and a chance-up effect and a variation pattern including a chance-up effect without a stock effect are provided in advance, and the former is provided on the main board 11 side. When the variation pattern is determined, the performance control board 12 side determines the performance contents of the stock performance and the chance-up performance according to the modes shown in FIGS. When the board 11 side determines the latter variation pattern, the performance control board 12 side determines whether or not to execute the chance-up performance and the type of the chance-up performance to be executed based on the determined variation pattern. In this way, by providing a pattern in which the chance-up effect is executed without executing the stock effect, the presence of the chance-up effect increases, and it is visualized that the chance-up effect will be executed in the future. The player can enjoy the performance while having a sense of superiority in the situation. Furthermore, in such a case, if the stock effect is executed in advance, the ratio of executing many chance-up effects is higher than when it is not executed (that is, the chance-up effect increases the expectation of a big hit. It may be configured so that it is likely to be high), the execution of the stock effect may be prioritized, and the execution of the stock effect may be expected.

In addition, in this example, the first half of super reach and the second half of super reach are always present in super reach, but the configuration is not limited to this. By omitting it, the super reach introduction part may be followed by the super reach second half part, and the chance-up effect may be performed in the second half part. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the total effect execution time of reach with a high degree of expectation from becoming too long.

In addition, when setting an exception pattern that omits the first half of Super Reach, in the basic pattern that is not omitted as a premise, when developing from the first half of Super Reach to the second half of Super Reach, the boundary between the first half and the second half is related to Super Reach. It is desirable that another effect image is displayed in such a manner as to completely cover the effect image, or that the effect contents are clearly divided between the first half and the latter half. For example, at the boundary between the first half and the second half, an effect image or character related to the chance-up effect shown in FIG. may be displayed in such a manner as to cover all of them. Further, for example, the production contents may be divided such that the outpost production is executed in the first half part and the battle production is executed in the second half part, or the battle scene is displayed in the first half part and the character performs a special move in the second half part. The content of the presentation may be divided by displaying a final scene such as a draw. By doing so, even when the super reach first half part is omitted, it is possible to make the flow of production feel natural.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-3, for the sake of convenience, the intervals between the stock timing and the timing at which the chance-up effect is executed are uniform. OK.

(Execution time of each production in Super Reach)
Next, the execution time of each effect in Super Reach will be described. FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution time of each effect in the first half part and the second half part of Super Reach.

Of the examples shown in FIG. 8-4, FIG. 8-4 (A) shows the title display (title display is displayed at the first timing of the first half of the super reach (the timing of (1) shown in FIG. 8-4) effect) is executed, and a chance-up effect is executed for dialogue display (dialogue effect that displays dialogue display) at the third timing (timing (3) shown in FIG. 8-4). Then, at the fifth timing (timing of (5) shown in FIG. 8-4), an example of executing a chance-up effect for the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) (of the chance-up effect to be described later) corresponding to the eighth effect pattern) is shown.

In addition, in FIG. 8-4 (B), the chance-up effect for the title display (the effect of displaying the title display) is executed at the first timing of the first half of the super reach, and the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) is executed at the fifth timing. An example (corresponding to the seventh effect pattern of the chance-up effect to be described later) in which the chance-up effect is executed for the decoration symbol effect displaying the pattern is shown.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-4, in the second half of Super Reach, a movable body effect is performed in which the movable body 32 moves before the end of variation (for example, when notifying that the game will be controlled for a big win).

In this example, there are two cases: a case where the dialogue effect without the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 8-4A is executed, and a case where the dialogue effect with the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 8-4B is executed. , the performance to be the target of the chance-up performance is configured such that when the performance mode changes due to the chance-up performance, the execution time is longer than when the chance-up performance does not change the performance mode. there is Specifically, the effect execution time T11 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is longer than the effect execution time T12 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(B). With such a configuration, when the chance-up performance is executed, a period for executing the chance-up performance and its target performance (for example, a period for notifying the change and the performance mode after the change) is ensured. be able to.

In addition, if the effect execution time of the effect is changed depending on the presence or absence of the chance-up effect, the execution timing of other effects will be affected, so the amount of data related to effect control will increase and the processing will become complicated. There is a risk. Moreover, since the variable time (that is, the total performance execution time) is fixedly fixed in advance for each variation pattern, there is a possibility that the performance will not be completed within the time or that the time will be left over. Therefore, in this example, by varying the execution period of the movable body presentation depending on the presence or absence of the chance-up presentation, the influence on other presentations is suppressed, and all presentations are made to fit within the time period without discomfort.

That is, in this example, the effect execution time T11 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is longer than the effect execution time T12 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. The effect execution time T21 of the movable body effect shown in 4(A) is shorter than the effect execution time T12 of the movable body effect shown in FIG. 8-4(B). And, the effect execution time of the chance-up effect for the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect for displaying the decorative pattern) is common.

As the movable body effect, for example, the movable body 32 is moved from the initial position to the effect position in front of the display area of the image display device 5 and is controlled to be positioned at the effect position for a predetermined period, and the image display device is displayed during the predetermined period. 5, control is performed to display an effect image or the like so as to emphasize the movable body production (at this time, the movable body 32 itself may move at the production position). When performing control to move to a position, the rendering execution time of the movable body rendering can be adjusted by lengthening or shortening the period during which the movable body 32 is positioned at the rendering position. By adjusting the effect execution time of the movable body effect in this way, it is possible to cope with minute changes in the effect time depending on whether or not there is a chance up. With such a configuration, the production execution time of the production is changed depending on the presence or absence of the chance-up production, while preventing an increase in the amount of data related to the production control and complication of the processing, and making all the productions uncomfortable. can be completed within the time frame.

Note that the adjustment of the performance time may be performed by, for example, a performance other than the movable body performance. For example, if the variable display result is a loss and the movable object effect is not executed before the end of the variation, after the effect image related to super reach is restored to the normal background image before the end of the change, a decorative pattern indicating the loss is displayed. may be adjusted by lengthening or shortening the time for which the temporary stop display is performed.

Further, in this example, the chance-up effect can be executed a plurality of times, and the execution time is varied according to the chance-up effect to be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-4(A), the chance-up effect for decorative patterns has a longer execution time than the chance-up effect for title display and dialogue display. Although the details will be described later, the chance-up effect for decorative patterns has a higher chance of winning than the chance-up effect for title display and dialogue display. can increase With such a configuration, various chance-up effects can be executed in a suitable execution time, and the effects of the effects can be enhanced.

Also, in this example, when one chance-up effect targeting one effect is being executed, another chance-up effect targeting another effect is not executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, the chance-up effect with different targets is executed after a predetermined period of time has passed. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the chance-up effect being executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-5 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 030IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (stop symbol) is determined (step 030IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 030IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the decoration pattern is stopped) A display result determining means for determining the pattern) is realized. Incidentally, when a pseudo-run is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step 030IWS802, sets a chance symbol (for example, like "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-run. , A combination of a jackpot pattern that does not become a reach and a pattern that is shifted by one pattern, or a combination of patterns in which the medium pattern is a special pattern exclusively for pseudo-ren (characters such as "NEXT" are written and numbers are written) It also decides what is not possible to constitute a jackpot combination). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 030IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the decorative symbols to be stopped based on only the variation pattern command. .

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decoration patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the ready-to-win effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined. In addition, even if it is lost, in the case of "time saving lost", a combination of decorative symbols of the lost symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols) is determined. It should be noted that it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missing symbols including different special symbols (for example, heart-shaped symbols and diamond-shaped symbols) according to the time-saving type.

The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a variation pattern including super reach (with chance up) (step 030IWS803). Then, if the variation pattern does not include super reach (with chance up), the process proceeds to step 030IWS811.

If the variation pattern includes super reach (with chance up), the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the stock effect (step 030IWS804). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the chance-up effect (step 030IWS805). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode after changing the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect (step 030IWS806). After that, the process moves to step 030IWS811. The details of steps 030IWS804, S805 and S806 will be described later.

At step 030IWS811, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the contents of the variation pattern and the determined effect (step 030IWS811).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 030IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Also, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80 . Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the variation pattern involving the ready-to-win effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed. Process data indicating to display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the simulated run and the sliding effect. may

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 030IWS813). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

By executing the process of step 030 IWS813, an effect corresponding to the variation pattern and the content determined to be executed is realized.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 030IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 030IWS815).

Next, details of the process of determining the effect pattern of the stock effect in the variable display start setting process (step 030IWS804) will be described.

At step 030 IWS804, for example, the stock effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS.

Specifically, when the variation pattern is super reach A (with chance up) variation pattern PA2-4, PB2-4, the first stock effect pattern determination table (super reach A) shown in FIG. By referring to it, one of the first effect pattern in which one item (key) is stocked as the effect result and the second to third effect patterns in which two items (keys) are stocked as the effect result is determined.

Further, when the variation pattern is super reach B (with chance up) variation pattern PA2-5, PB2-5, refer to the second stock effect pattern determination table (super reach B) shown in FIG. 8-6(B). , 1st production pattern to stock 1 item (key) as a production result, 2nd to 3rd production patterns to stock 2 items (keys) as a production result, 3 items (keys) to be stocked as a production result. Any one of the fourth to fifth production patterns is determined.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-3 and 8-6, there are opportunities to stock items (keys) at timing A, timing B, and timing C during the stock effect. For example, in the first effect pattern, At timing A, one item (key) is stocked, and at timings B and C, no item (key) is stocked. For example, in the fifth effect pattern, one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no item (key) is stocked at timing B, and two items (keys) are stocked at timing C. Thus, in this example, an opportunity to stock one or more items (keys) is provided at each timing.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-6(A) and 8-6(B), each effect pattern of the stock effect is configured so that the proportion determined at the time of the big win is different. That is, it is configured such that the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the number of stocked items (keys) and the timing of stocking. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect pattern of the stock effect.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-6(A) to (B), the super reach A and the super reach B are configured so that the effect pattern of the stock effect that can be determined is different. Specifically, at super reach A, a maximum of two items (keys) can be stocked, and at super reach B, a maximum of three items (keys) can be stocked. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to which type of super reach the stock effect is executed.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 (A) to (B), the item (key) is stocked at timing A (in other words, the stock effect is executed) regardless of the effect pattern. It is configured so that at least one item (key) is stocked when the With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having no expectations for the stock performance or not paying attention to the stock performance due to the case where the items are not stocked even if the stock performance is executed. be able to.

In this example, since the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the stock effect is executed than when the stock effect is not executed, the player expects the occurrence of the stock effect. Therefore, for example, in the normal reach before the start of the super reach (the state in which the left and right patterns are tense and the middle pattern is fluctuating in the image display device 5), an effect suggesting that the stock effect will be executed, and the execution You may make it perform the production|presentation which stirs whether it is done or not. For example, when the stock effect is executed, in the normal reach state, a special symbol such as a "key stock time symbol" as a medium symbol may be stopped to shift to the stock effect. Also, for example, when the stock effect is executed, in the normal ready-to-win state, the medium pattern starts to fluctuate at high speed, and after the screen is changed to the super ready-to-win (white out or the like to cover the display area of the image display device 5), the super Instead of the reach first half part (outpost production), it may be shifted to the stock production.

Next, details of the process of determining the effect pattern of the chance-up effect in the variable display start setting process (step 030IWS805) will be described.

At step 030 IWS805, for example, the chance-up effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS.

Specifically, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-4 and PB2-4 of Super Reach A (with chance increase), and the stock number of items determined in step 030IWS804 is 1, With reference to the first chance-up production pattern determination table (super reach A: one chance-up) shown in FIG. do.

In addition, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-4 and PB2-4 of Super Reach A (with chance up), and the number of items in stock determined in step 030IWS804 is 2, With reference to the second chance-up effect pattern determination table (super reach A: chance-up twice) shown in 7(B), one of the fifth to sixth effect patterns for performing the chance-up effect twice is determined.

In addition, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-5 and PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with chance up) and the stock number of items determined in step 030IWS804 is 1, With reference to the third chance-up production pattern determination table (super reach B: one-time chance-up) shown in 7(C), one of the first to fourth production patterns for performing one chance-up production is determined.

In addition, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-5 and PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with chance up), and the number of items in stock determined in step 030IWS804 is 2, With reference to the fourth chance-up effect pattern determination table (super reach B: chance-up twice) shown in 7(D), one of the fifth to seventh effect patterns for performing the chance-up effect twice is determined.

In addition, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-5 and PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with chance up) and the number of items in stock determined in step 030IWS804 is 3, With reference to the fifth chance-up effect pattern determination table (super reach B: chance-up 3 times) shown in 7(E), the eighth effect pattern of performing the chance-up effect three times is determined.

For example, in the first effect pattern of the chance-up effect, the chance-up effect of changing the effect mode of the title display (the effect of displaying the title display) is executed once. Further, for example, in the eighth production pattern of the chance-up production, the production mode of the title display (production of displaying the title display) is changed, and the production mode of the dialogue display (dialogue display is displayed) is changed. and a chance-up effect for changing the effect mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect for displaying the decorative pattern) are executed respectively.

In this example, before the chance-up effect is executed, the chance-up effect is executed to incite whether or not the chance-up effect is to be executed. There are two types of chance-up stimulating effects: one in which the chance-up effect is executed after the effect, and the other in which the chance-up effect is not executed. ).

In the chance-up fanning effect (true), after an image suggesting a keyhole corresponding to the stocked item (key) (for example, keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13) is displayed, an image showing the keyhole (for example, keyhole (entity) ) the image 030IWG11) is displayed. On the other hand, in the chance-up inciting effect (false), after an image suggesting a keyhole corresponding to the stocked item (key) (for example, keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13) is displayed, an image showing the keyhole (for example, keyhole The (substantial) image 030IWG11) is not displayed, and the image suggesting the keyhole (for example, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13) is deleted.

In this example, the chance-up fanning effect (true) is always executed before the chance-up effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-7, for example, in the fourth effect pattern and the seventh effect pattern of the chance-up effect, the chance-up effect is executed for dialogue display (dialogue effect for displaying the dialogue display). However, the chance-up prompting effect (false) that is not executed as a result is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the effects the chance-up effect is to be executed. Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-7, when the chance-up effect is not executed and the stocked item (key) remains, the chance-up effect (false) is executed. You may do so.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) to (E), each production pattern of the chance-up production is configured such that the ratio determined at the time of the big win is different (that is, the degree of expectation for the big win is different). . With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect pattern of the chance-up effect. In particular, it is constructed so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes higher as the timing of change as the object of the chance-up effect becomes later (that is, in the order of decorative pattern change>word display change>title display change). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which timing and which chance-up effect targeting which effect is executed.

In addition, in this example, the chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) is not executed in the case of super reach A, and can be executed only in the case of super reach B. there is With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which type of super reach the chance-up effect is executed.

It should be noted that not only the examples shown in FIGS. 8-7, but also in any kind of super reach, the chance-up effect of changing the effect mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect displaying the decorative pattern) can be executed. may be In addition, in this example, the chance-up effect is configured to be executed a maximum of three times. Further, the chance-up performance for the active display can be executed at both the second timing and the fourth timing so that the chance-up performance is executed up to five times. good too.

Next, the details of the processing (step 030IWS806) of determining the effect mode after the change of the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect in the variable display start setting process will be described.

In step 030 IWS 806, if it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the title display (effect for displaying the title display), the title display change pattern shown in FIG. 8-8(A) is determined. Refer to the table to determine the pattern of change. Further, when it is decided to execute a chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the active display (effect of displaying the active display), the active display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(B) is changed. Refer to it to determine the pattern of change. In addition, when it is decided to execute a chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the dialogue display (the dialogue effect that displays the dialogue display), the dialogue display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(C) to determine the pattern of change. Also, if it is decided to execute a chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern), the decorative pattern change pattern shown in FIG. 8-8 (D) is determined. Refer to the table to determine the pattern of change.

In this example, title display (effect of displaying title display), active display (effect of displaying active display), dialogue display (effect of displaying dialogue display) and decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect of displaying decorative pattern) , the degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested by the color tone of the effect image related to the effect. For example, it is configured to suggest that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high in the order of gold>red>green>blue>normal color (white).

When the title display change pattern is determined to be the first change pattern, the title display changes from the normal color (white) to blue, and when the second change pattern is determined, the title display changes to the normal color ( white) to green.

Also, when the change pattern of the active display is determined to be the first change pattern, the active display changes from normal color (white) to blue at the first timing of the first half of Super Reach, and is determined to be the second change pattern. In this case, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to green at the first timing, and if the third change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to green at the third timing. If the fourth change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to red at the third timing.

In addition, if it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect that changes the pending display (and active display), the effect pattern determined as the pre-reading notice effect at the time of the start winning (for example, the change timing and the display mode after the change are determined) ), a chance-up effect targeting the active display may be executed.

When the change pattern of dialogue display is determined to be the first change pattern, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to blue, and when the second change pattern is determined, the dialogue display changes to the normal color ( white) to green, and if the third change pattern is determined, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to red.

In addition, when the variation pattern of the decorative design is determined to be the first variation pattern, the decorative design changes from the normal color (white) to green, and when the second variation pattern is determined, the decorative design changes to the normal color. The color (white) changes to red, and when the third change pattern is determined, the decorative pattern changes from the normal color (white) to gold.

In this example, when the effect mode of the target effect changes due to the chance-up effect, the tendency of the effect mode after the change is different according to the timing of the change. Specifically, the chance-up effect for the active display is configured such that the third timing after the first timing is more likely to change to a more expected effect mode. In addition, the chance-up effect for decorative patterns is executed later than the chance-up effect for title display, active display, and dialogue display, and it is easy to change to a production mode with high expectations. is configured to With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the timing at which the chance-up effect is executed, and the game with expectations for the changing timing (for example, expectations increased as the first half of the super reach progressed). It is possible to prevent disappointing people.

In addition, if the color displayed after the change at the earlier timing suggests that the expectation is higher than the color displayed after the change at the later timing, it will be displayed after the change at the later timing. The effect mode (color) to be displayed may be re-determined so as not to cause a decline in the degree of expectation.

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of a super ready-to-win effect including a stock effect and a chance-up effect will be described. 8-9 to 8-10 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of stock effects. In addition, in FIGS. 8-9 to 8-10, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

(Stock production (5th production pattern))
In Figures 8-9 to 8-10, one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no item (key) is stocked at timing B, and two items (keys) are stocked at timing C. A stock effect of the fifth effect pattern is shown.

Specifically, when the variable display is started and the ready-to-win state is established, a decorative design showing "6" is displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R of the image display device 5. Then, at the start timing of the stock effect, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1), the image display device 5 displays the title display of the stock effect "KEY STOCK" and "TIME". Note that the display mode of the title display may indicate the number of items (keys) to be stocked in the stock effect to be started later, or that many items (keys) are to be stocked. For example, the title display is generally displayed in normal color (white), but when displayed in red, it suggests that there are more items (keys) stocked than when displayed in normal color (white). may be made.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1), except during a special effect, etc., the active display AH is displayed on the lower left side of the display area of the image display device 5 as the active display, and corresponds to the special symbol. A small pattern KZ and a reserved memory count HS indicating the reserved memory count are displayed on the central right side of the display area of the image display device 5 .

Next, when the stock effect is started, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), a timer image 030IWG01 indicating the remaining time of the stock effect and a "key stock TIME" display 030IWG02 indicating that the stock effect is in progress. is displayed. Further, at timing A of the stock effect, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), a character A prompting an operation to press the push button 31B, an operation effective period, and an image simulating the push button 31B are displayed. .

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, one key is stocked at the timing A. Therefore, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period (or when the operation valid period elapses), FIG. As shown in 9(3), the background image is covered with a character display of "stock x 1" indicating that one key is stocked as an item, an image imitating the key, and an effect image emphasizing them. is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (4), one key moves from the upper left of the screen of the image display device to the lower right of the screen and is stocked. A display that looks like it is stocked on the right front side of the screen) is performed.

When the effect display for stocking the keys ends, the effect display for progressing the stock effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-9 (5). Specifically, an effect display is performed in which the character A rides on a swing in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and a display is performed in which the remaining time shown in the timer image 030IWG01 decreases. At this time, a stock key image 030G03 indicating the number of keys currently stocked is displayed.

Next, at the timing B of the stock effect, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (6), a character A prompting an operation to press the push button 31B, an operation effective period, and an image simulating the push button 31B are displayed. . In this example, an effect display prompting the user to press the push button 31B is performed at timing A, timing B, and timing C of the stock effect, but the character A poses differently. Therefore, even if the effect for prompting the pressing operation is performed a plurality of times, the interest of each timing can be improved without boring the player.

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, the key is not stocked at the timing B. Therefore, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period (or when the operation valid period elapses), FIG. 8-9 (7 ), an image with a close-up face of character A, a character display of "!?" The image shown is not displayed.

In this way, by executing an effect such as displaying a character image instead of the key when the key is not stocked, it is possible to alleviate the regret that the key was not stocked. In addition, in the stock effect of this example, even if only one key is stocked, the effect execution time is equivalent to the case where three keys are stocked. Therefore, if the key is not stocked even if the button is pressed for a period of time, the presentation becomes redundant, and there is a risk that the interest will decrease. Therefore, when the key is not stocked in this way, the character image is displayed instead to liven up the presentation, so that the stock presentation is not lowered even if the stock number is small. It should be noted that the character image to be displayed when not stocked is not limited to one type, and may be varied according to the type of Super Reach to be executed. By doing so, it is possible to anticipate the future development from the displayed character image, and to give the character image a dramatic meaning.

Since the effect display shown in FIG. 8-9 (7) is performed when the key is not stocked (that is, indicating that the key is not stocked), the effect display shown in FIG. 8-9 (7) is displayed. After the displayed image is erased, an effect display in which the stock effect progresses as shown in FIG. 8-9(8) is displayed, but the number of stocked keys indicated by the stock key image 030G03 does not increase. Note that the effect display when the item is stocked as shown in FIG. 8-9 (3) and the effect display when the item is not stocked as shown in FIG. A short period is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed or losing interest by displaying an unfavorable effect for a long time without the effect of increasing the number of stocks. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (9), an effect display in which the stock effect progresses is displayed, and at timing C of the stock effect, the push button 31B is pressed as shown in FIG. 8-10 (10). A character A prompting an operation, an operation effective period, and an image simulating the push button 31B are displayed.

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, two keys are stocked at the timing C. Therefore, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period (or when the operation valid period elapses), FIG. As shown in 10 (11), the background image is covered with a character display of "stock x 2" indicating that two keys are stocked as items, an image imitating the key, and an effect image emphasizing them. is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (12), an effect display in which two keys are stocked by moving from the upper left of the screen of the image display device to the lower right of the screen (for example, a key flying from the left back side of the screen) A display that looks like it is stocked on the right front side of the screen) is performed.

When the effect display for stocking the keys ends, the effect display for progressing the stock effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-10 (13). Then, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (14), when the remaining time indicated by the timer image 030IWG01 reaches 0, as shown in FIG. will be

Then, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation effective period (or when the operation effective period elapses), as shown in FIG. VS Enemy Character B", character A and enemy character B are displayed, and the stock presentation ends.

In this example, when executing the super reach with chance up, first, the stock effect is executed in the super reach introduction part. Then, in the first half of the super ready-to-win, a prelude effect such as a dialogue effect in which the character A and the enemy character B face each other and have a conversation is mainly executed, and a chance-up effect is additionally executed. After that, in the second half of Super Reach, a battle effect is executed in which character A and enemy character B exchange swords. In addition, when executing super reach without chance increase, in the first half of super reach, an outpost production such as dialogue production in which character A and enemy character B face each other and have a conversation is executed, and in the second half of super reach, A battle effect is executed in which the character A and the enemy character B exchange swords.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-10 (16), the battle card for the battle production is "Character A VS Enemy Character B". are different) are provided, and the battle card is determined according to the type of super reach. In other words, the type of super ready-to-win is notified by displaying a battle card with a battle effect triggered by the pressing operation of the push button 31B. With such a configuration, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation and tension when performing the pressing operation of the push button 31B at the timing shown in FIG. 8-10 (15). For example, in addition to or instead of the types of super reach, the types of characters on the team side and characters on the enemy side may differ according to the degree of expectation for a big hit. Further, for example, if the production stage is configured to transition according to the game period or game state such as the number of fluctuations, the character associated with the production stage in advance may be one of the enemy characters (the production stage may be any one of a plurality of enemy characters associated with , or may be an enemy character determined by lottery).

(Stock production (first production pattern))
Next, the stock effect of the first effect pattern in which one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no item (key) is stocked at timing B and timing C, and one key is stocked as a result will be described. do.

When the stock effect of the first effect pattern is executed, after the screen transition of FIGS. 8-9 (1) to (8), as shown in FIG. A stock key image 030G03 indicating that there is a stock key is displayed, and an effect display in which the stock effect progresses is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (10), when the remaining time indicated by the timer image 030IWG01 reaches 0, a display prompting the user to press the push button 31B is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (11). will be

Then, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period (or when the operation valid period passes), as shown in FIG. VS Enemy Character B", character A and enemy character B are displayed, and the stock presentation ends.

(Outline of Super Reach first half and second half)
Next, the outline of the effects in the first half part and the second half part of Super Reach will be described. FIGS. 8-12 and 8-13 are explanatory diagrams showing an outline of effects in the first half part and the second half part of Super Reach. In addition, in FIGS. 8-12 and 8-13, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

When the Super Reach introduction part (stock effect) ends and the first half of Super Reach begins, as shown in Fig. 8-12 (1), the title display of Super Reach B with the words "Death Fight between Two People" is displayed. be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-12(1), in the lower right of the display area of the image display device 5, a mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the number of mini-key images 030IWG10 stocked in the stock effect are displayed. In this example, it is assumed that three keys are stocked in the stock effect in advance, and the three keys are displayed in a manner of moving around the mini-character A. In this example, the keys stocked in the stock effect of the super reach introduction part are displayed as the mini key image 030IWG10 or the key image 030IWG12 in the first half of the super reach.

In addition, in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative design showing "6" is displayed, and the active display AH is displayed on the lower left side of the display area of the image display device 5 as the active display. , and a small symbol KZ corresponding to the special symbol and a reserved memory number HS indicating the number of reserved memories are displayed on the central right side of the display area of the image display device 5 .

8-12(2), the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face each other, and after the dialogue image 030IWG20 of "It's a game" is displayed, As shown in 12(3), the line image 030IWG20 of "I'll get back to you" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12(4), the character A image 030IWC01 is displayed alone, and the dialogue image 030IWG20 saying "I won't hold back" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (2) to (4), when the outpost effect is being executed and the chance-up effect is not being executed, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed on the image display device 5. An effect display is performed in which the ends of the display area are moved. At this time, an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Here, when the chance-up effect targeting the dialogue effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (5), a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 imitating a keyhole is displayed in a manner overlapping the dialogue image 030IWG20. be done. At this time, a mini-character A image 030IWC10 holding one key is displayed beside the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11. Such an effect display indicates that the target of the chance-up effect is the dialogue effect.

Next, a key image 030IWG12 and a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. ) As an effect display, a key image 030IWG12 rotated from a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-12(7).

When the effect display of turning the key through the keyhole (that is, unlocking the key) is performed, the dialog image 030IWG20 changes from normal color (white) to blue, as shown in FIG. 8-12(8). With such an effect display, the effect mode of the dialogue effect changes as a result of the chance-up effect.

After that, when the super reach first half part (outpost effect and chance up effect) ends and the super reach second half part begins, character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-13 (9). A battle production where swords are exchanged begins.

Then, when the character A wins against the enemy character A, the characters "Victory" are displayed as shown in FIG. A combination of "666" decorative patterns is displayed.

(Chance up production)
Next, the chance-up effect outlined in FIG. 8-12 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 8-14 to 8-18. FIGS. 8-14 to 8-18 also show portions of the chance-up effect that are omitted from FIG. 8-12.

FIGS. 8-14 and 8-15 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the chance-up effect for active display. In addition, in FIGS. 8-14 and 8-15, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

In the first half of super reach, as shown in FIG. 8-14(1), a prelude effect is executed in which the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face each other. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-14(1), an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move at the end of the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. At this time, an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Effect images related to outpost effects (for example, character A image 030IWC01, enemy character A image 030IWC02, etc.) are also displayed in FIGS. In this example, the effect image related to the outpost effect is a effect image related to the chance-up effect (for example, a key image, a keyhole image, a mini character image, etc.), and a effect image related to the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect (for example, (Title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern), and is displayed in a lower layer than those images. Although the details will be described later, the effect image related to the outpost effect is hidden by the effect image related to the chance-up effect at the timings of (13) to (14) in FIG. 8-15.

Next, when the chance-up fanning effect (true) is executed, a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 suggesting the appearance of a keyhole is displayed in the center of the display area, as shown in FIG. 8-14(2). At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 stop moving to the end of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini-key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini-character A image 030IWC10. . Next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10, a "!" indicating the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(3), an effect display is started in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is gradually reduced. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-14(4), the gradually shrinking keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaches the active display AH targeted for the chance-up effect, and eventually, as shown in FIG. 8-14(5). Then, an effect display is performed in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 overlaps the active display AH. At this time, a triangular mark indicating reduction is displayed around the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (2) to (5), the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 move so as to follow the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaching the active display AH. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the chance-up effect and the target effect of the chance-up effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(6), the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 becomes a silhouette on the active display AH, and an effect display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed. At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are put in a silhouette state, and an effect display is also performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(7), a keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 imitating a keyhole is displayed on the active display AH. This kind of effect display makes it clear that the chance-up boosting effect being executed is the chance-up boosting effect (true) and that the target of the chance-up effect is the active display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(8), an effect display is performed in which the character A located on the front side of the screen throws the key into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 located on the back side of the screen. . Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15(9), an effect display is performed in which the key image 030IWG12 appears to move from the front side of the screen toward the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 on the back side. Therefore, the key image 030IWG12 is initially displayed in a larger display size than the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 as shown in FIG. 8-15 (9), and then reduced as shown in FIG. 8-15 (10) It is displayed so as to move toward the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 while (gradually becoming smaller as an expression of going away). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the key image 030IWG12 acting on the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11, thereby enhancing the effect of the chance-up presentation.

Then, as an effect display of the key being stuck in the keyhole, a key image 030IWG12 and a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. As a display, a key image 030IWG12 rotated from a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-15(12).

When an effect display is performed in which the key turns through the keyhole (ie, the key is unlocked), as shown in FIG. A character display is displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13), the character A is displayed close up together with the effect image covering the effect image related to the outpost effect, whereby the chance-up effect is executed during the outpost effect. It reduces the sense of discomfort.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (14), the character A and the character display of "pending rank up" are erased while the effect image covering the image related to the outpost production is displayed, and the active display AH is in the silhouette state. , and an effect display is performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed. At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are displayed again, and an effect display is also performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed.

In this example, when the chance-up effect for the active display is executed, as shown in FIG. 030IWC10>effect image covering the image related to the outpost effect>active display AH>image related to the outpost effect are displayed in higher layers in this order.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (15), the effect image covering the image related to the outpost effect is erased, and the active display AH changed from normal color (white) to blue is displayed. In addition, since one of the stocks has been released and the item (key) has been consumed by the chance-up effect for the active display, the number of mini-key images 030IWG10 that moves around the mini-character A image 030IWC10 is one. It's getting less.

In this example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed when the effect targeted for the chance-up effect is being executed, and the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is acted on by the key image 030IWG12. to run. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 and 8-15, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, and a key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11. Execute the chance-up production at . With such a configuration, when the chance-up effect using the key image 030IWG12 is executed, the key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 and turns around (that is, the key is opened). It is possible to enhance the performance effect and improve the amusement.

In addition, in this example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed at substantially the center position of the effect image related to the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect (for example, see FIG. 8-14 (7)). At the timing when 030IWG11 is displayed, the chance-up effect for other effects is not executed. For example, at the timing when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, the chance-up effect for the dialogue display is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the chance-up effect, and to make the player pay attention to when the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (1) to (8), the stored key image and character image (that is, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10) are moved and displayed to create a chance-up effect. is executed, an effect display is performed in which the character throws the key into the keyhole. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the key image and enhance the effect of the chance-up presentation.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (1) to (6), the mini-key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini-character A-image 030IWC10, and when the chance-up effect is executed, , to stop its operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the key image and enhance the effect of the chance-up presentation.

Also, in this example, the appearance of the key is different between when the key is stocked and when the key is used. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (8), when the key image is displayed in the lower right of the display area in the stock effect, and as shown in FIG. The display size of the key image is smaller in the latter case than when the key image is displayed so as to move. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the key image easily visible in the stock effect in which the key is the main focus, and to prevent the key from standing out too much in the outpost effect. For example, when the key is stocked in the stock effect, and when the character throws the key toward the keyhole in the chance up effect (the most enlarged state at the beginning), the display size of the key image is larger in the latter. You can make it With such a configuration, it is possible to have a greater impact when releasing the stock than when the key is stocked. Further, by giving an impact, even if the performance targeted for the chance-up performance has a low degree of expectation, it is possible to impress the player that it is a desirable performance.

Next, a specific example of the chance-up effect for decorative symbols will be described. FIGS. 8-16 to 8-18 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of chance-up effects for decorative symbols. In addition, in FIGS. 8-16 to 8-18, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

In the first half of Super Reach, as shown in FIG. 8-16(1), an outpost effect is executed in which the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face each other. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-16(1), an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move at the end of the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini-character A image 030IWC10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-16(1), the movable body 32 is positioned at the initial position covering part of the upper display area of the image display device 5 .

Effect images related to outpost effects (for example, character A image 030IWC01, enemy character A image 030IWC02, etc.) are also displayed in FIGS. In this example, the effect image related to the outpost effect is a effect image related to the chance-up effect (for example, a key image, a keyhole image, a mini character image, etc.), and a effect image related to the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect (for example, (Title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern), and is displayed in a lower layer than those images.

Next, when the chance-up fanning effect (true) is executed, a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 suggesting the appearance of a keyhole is displayed in the center of the display area, as shown in FIG. 8-16(2). At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 stop moving to the end of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini-key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini-character A image 030IWC10. . Next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10, a "!" indicating the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed. Note that the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 displayed in the chance-up effect is represented by a dotted line in this example as shown in FIGS. It has a transparency that makes it possible to visually recognize the effect image), and the content of the super reach (that is, the outpost effect) is not hindered as much as possible even while the chance-up fan effect is being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(3), an effect display is started in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is gradually reduced. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (4), the gradually shrinking keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaches the decorative pattern display area that is the target of the chance-up effect, and eventually, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (5). Thus, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 reaches near the central position between the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R (the position corresponding to the middle decorative design display area 5C). At this time, a triangular mark indicating reduction is displayed around the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13. Also, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are displayed to move so as to follow the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaching the active display AH.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(6), the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 becomes a silhouette state, and an effect display is performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed. At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are put in a silhouette state, and an effect display is also performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-16(5) to 8-16(6), when changing the pose of mini-character A, the silhouette image is displayed once, and then the silhouette image is displayed. , the mini-character A image in the pose after the change from . In this way, instead of using material data that changes the pose of a mini character by moving it, the material data is simplified by switching the image with the silhouette image in between, thereby reducing the man-hours and costs required for production. be able to.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(7), a keyhole (substantial) image is placed near the central position between the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R (the position corresponding to the middle decorative design display area 5C). 030IWG11 is displayed. Through such presentation display, it becomes clear that the chance-up fanning presentation being executed is the chance-up fanning presentation (true), and that the object of the chance-up fanning presentation is the decoration pattern.

In this example, when executing the chance-up effect targeting dialogue effects, as shown in FIG. When executing the chance-up effect for the pattern, as shown in FIG. A keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the display area from the corresponding position). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 from being covered by the movable body 32 and becoming difficult to see, and the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is preferably displayed according to the characteristics of the target effect. can do.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(8), an effect display is performed in which the character A located on the front side of the screen throws the key into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 located on the back side of the screen. . Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17(9), an effect display is performed in which the key image 030IWG12 appears to move from the front side of the screen toward the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 on the back side. Therefore, the key image 030IWG12 is initially displayed in a larger display size than the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 as shown in FIG. 8-17(9), and then as shown in FIG. It is displayed so as to move toward the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 while shrinking (gradually becoming smaller as an expression of moving away).

8-17 (11), a key image 30IWG12 and a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 are displayed as an effect display that the key is stuck in the keyhole, and an effect that the key turns in the keyhole (that is, the key is unlocked). As a display, a key image 030IWG12 rotated from a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-17(12).

When the effect display of turning the key through the keyhole (that is, unlocking the key) is performed, the character A and the character display of "symbol rank up" are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13). Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (14), while the character A and the character display of "symbol rank up" are displayed, the left decoration design starts rotating in the left decoration design display area 5L, and the right decoration design is displayed. An effect display is performed in which the right decorative pattern starts rotating in the pattern display area 5R. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (13) to (14), the character A is displayed close-up to hide the effect image related to the outpost effect, and the chance-up effect is executed during the outpost effect. It reduces the discomfort of being

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (15), an image of characters A and B standing side by side is displayed near the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the left ornament rotates to a position superimposed on the image. An effect display is performed in which the pattern and the right decorative pattern move. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (16), a glowing effect image is displayed around the rotating left decorative pattern and right decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (17), when the glowing effect image around the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern is erased, the normal color (white) changes to gold and the characters "GOLD" are displayed. The left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern with the display are displayed, and the effect display is performed in which the rotation of the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (18), gold right and left decorative patterns are displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, and the remaining outpost effect is performed. executed. Since all the stocked keys have been used due to the execution of the chance-up effect for the decoration pattern, the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 are not displayed thereafter, but a message indicating that they will not be displayed is displayed. No special effects are performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the mini-key image 030IWG10, which is no longer used, from standing out.

In this example, regardless of where the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed (that is, regardless of which production is the target of the chance-up production), at least a part of the chance-up promotion production is It is carried out in a common fashion. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (2) to (5) and FIGS. 8-16 (2) to (5), the keyhole (suggestion ) The image 030IWG13 is displayed in a common mode in which it is initially displayed in full screen and then reduced in size. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed, that is, whether or not the chance-up effect is executed, and which effect is the target of the chance-up effect. can draw attention to.

In this example, in the chance-up effect, regardless of the position where the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed (that is, regardless of the type of target effect), the image is displayed at a common display position to be the target effect. It informs that the production mode of will change. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) and 8-17 (13), the character and the character display of "holding rank up" or "design rank up" are displayed, and the production mode is Notify you of changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the effect mode of the target effect changes due to the chance-up effect.

Further, in this example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is not displayed at the timing when the effect mode of the target effect changes in the chance-up effect. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) to (15) and FIGS. It is not displayed at the timing when the mode of changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the effect mode of the target effect is changed by the chance-up effect.

Further, in this example, the effect image related to at least a part of the multiple types of effects targeted for the chance-up effect has a higher display priority than the key image even when the key image acts on the keyhole image. high. Specifically, the decorative pattern has a higher display priority than the key image even when the key image acts on the keyhole image. With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the visibility of some effects in any situation. In addition, for effects images other than some effects (for example, those that are not information related to the progress of the game such as dialogue display and title display), display priority is given to the key image when the key image acts on the keyhole image. By making the intensity lower, it is possible to realize a more realistic presentation and enhance the presentation effect.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) and 8-17 (13), when executing the chance-up effect, an effect image or a character covering the effect image related to the outpost effect, a "suspended rank It is possible to display notification images such as character display such as "up" or "symbol rank up". Then, a production pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13) to FIG. In addition, a pattern in which the appearance of the decorative pattern changes while the characters and the character display of "pattern rank up" remain), and when the notification image is displayed, the effect of the target effect is changed. Effect pattern (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) to (15), the pattern in which the active display mode changes after the effect image, character, and character display of “pending rank up” are erased) , the chance-up effect can be executed. With such a configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the presentation mode of the target presentation changes by displaying the notification image, and the chance-up presentation can be suitably performed by the presentation pattern corresponding to the target presentation. can be executed. Especially for the former, by seamlessly increasing the chance while the notification image is being displayed (that is, changing the effect mode of the target effect), it is possible to make the effect more flashy. By performing a chance up (that is, a change in the effect mode of the target effect) after is erased, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data related to the effect control.

In addition, in this example, when the notification image is displayed, the effect pattern of changing the effect mode of the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect is different from when the notification image is displayed. The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than the performance pattern that changes the performance mode of the performance. Specifically, the chance-up effect in which the form of the decoration pattern changes has a higher expectation of a big hit than the chance-up effect in which the form of the active display changes (see FIG. 8-7). With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied according to the showiness of the production pattern, and the interest can be improved.

Further, in this example, the notification image uses an image that can specify which effect mode of the effect has changed, and is different from the effect image related to the effect. For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) and 8-17 (13), the character display of "pending rank up" or "symbol rank up" is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize which of the effects has changed in the effect mode.

Further, in this example, the notification image displayed during execution of the chance-up effect is displayed in a manner covering the effect image related to the super reach (outpost effect), but the effect targeted for the chance-up effect is There are cases where the image is covered by the notification image and cases where the image is not covered, and the latter has a higher expectation of a big hit than the former. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. "Rank up" is displayed, but this notification image covers the active display AH, but does not cover the decoration pattern. Then, the chance-up effect in which the form of the decoration pattern changes has a higher expectation for a big hit than the chance-up effect in which the form of the active display changes (see FIG. 8-7). With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied according to the showiness of the chance-up effect, and the interest can be improved.

Further, in this example, the effects targeted for the chance-up effect include those in which the relevant effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which the relevant effect image is not covered, and the latter is more within one variable display period than the former. The rate of execution at later timing is high. Specifically, the timing of execution of the chance-up effect in which the form of the decoration pattern changes is later than that of the chance-up effect in which the form of the active display changes (see FIG. 8-3). With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the chance-up effect in accordance with the time when the expectations of the player are high.

Further, in this example, the effects targeted for the chance-up effect include those in which the relevant effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which the effect image is not covered. Switch to an image and display it. Specifically, when the chance-up effect for the decoration pattern is executed, after the character A image is displayed as shown in FIGS. ) to FIG. 8-18 (17), an image in which character A and character B stand side by side is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the highly anticipated chance-up production.

Next, a specific example of the chance-up fanning effect (fake) will be described. FIG. 8-19 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the chance-up fanning effect (false). In addition, in FIG. 8-19, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

FIG. 8-19 (1) shows the state immediately after the outpost effect in the first half of the super reach is started and the chance-up effect for the active display is executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-19(1), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are placed at the initial position at the bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5 after the chance-up effect is executed. It is redisplayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are the targets of the chance-up effect (for example, title display, active display, dialogue display, decoration pattern). The end of the display area of the image display device 5 is moved so as to pass through the display position. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 8-19 (1) and (2), before the dialogue effect is started, so as to pass through the position where the dialogue image 030IWG20 is displayed (or the position where display is scheduled). An effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move. With such a configuration, when the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are displayed in a moving manner, it is desired to execute a chance-up effect targeting the effect at the displayed position. The expectation of the player can be heightened, and the amusement can be improved.

In this example, the effects targeted for the chance-up effect are displayed at various positions such as the upper, lower, and lower right portions of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are Move through the position. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the position where the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are moved and displayed, and whether the effect displayed at that position is the target of the chance-up effect. .

Further, in this example, after executing one chance-up effect targeting one effect, when executing another chance-up effect targeting another effect, one chance-up effect is executed and a predetermined period of time elapses. After that, another chance-up effect is executed (see FIG. 8-4). With such a configuration, it is possible to leave an interval between one chance-up effect and another chance-up effect to make each stand out, and as shown in FIGS. It is possible to secure a period during which the key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are displayed in a moving manner.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are moving at the end of the display area of the image display device 5, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image The 030IWC10 has a lower display priority than the effect images (for example, active display, dialogue display, decoration pattern, etc.) related to the effect that can be the target of the chance-up effect, and is displayed in a lower layer than them. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to an effect that can be the target of the chance-up effect. Note that the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are not limited to such a configuration, and are among the effects that can be the target of the chance-up effect when moving in the end of the display area of the image display device 5. Displayed on a lower layer than the effect image (for example, decoration pattern) related to some effects, and displayed on a higher layer than the effect image (for example, active display and dialogue display) related to other effects. good too.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed during execution of Super Ready-to-Wear, and are effect images related to Super-Reach (for example, character images related to Senseki effect). ), but when the chance-up effect is not being executed, at least the central part of the effect image relating to super reach is displayed so as not to be obstructed. Specifically, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed so as to move at the ends of the display area without moving in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. It is not superimposed and displayed on the part. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent interference with the super reach (outpost effect) while displaying the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Next, when the chance-up fanning effect (false) is executed, a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 suggesting the appearance of a keyhole is displayed in the center of the display area, as shown in FIG. 8-19(3). At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 stop moving to the end of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini-key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini-character A image 030IWC10. . Next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10, a "!" indicating the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19(3), when the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 move so as to approach the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13. do.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (2) and (3), the moving speeds of the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 are set when the target effect to be used is not specified (or when there is a chance When it is specified (or when the chance-up effect is not being executed), it is a high-speed movement. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect and the chance-up effect.

Next, an effect display in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 gradually shrinks is started, but as shown in FIG. ) The image 030IWG13 is erased. At this time, next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10, a "?" indicating that the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 has been deleted is displayed. With such a configuration, it becomes clear that the executed chance-up fanning effect is a chance-up fanning effect (false).

8-19(5), the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are displayed at the initial position at the bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5. It will be fixed. In this example, after the chance-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1), and after the chance-up effect (false) is executed as shown in FIG. , displayed in a common initial position. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the chance-up fanning effect (false) has ended, and it is possible to express the meaning of restarting. Moreover, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data related to effect control by redisplaying at the initial position.

In this example, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 and the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 can be displayed only once corresponding to the same presentation. For example, when a chance-up promotion effect (or chance-up promotion effect (false)) that agitates whether or not a chance-up production effect for dialogue display is executed once, the dialogue display is displayed after that. Even if it is, the chance-up fanning production targeting the dialogue display is not executed again. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to understand the suggestion effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

The mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are partly protruded outside the display area (that is, partly not displayed) when moving in the end of the display area of the image display device 5. good too. With such a configuration, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 can be flexibly moved and displayed in accordance with other effects such as effect images.

Further, for example, when the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are moving in the end of the display area of the image display device 5, an effect not targeted for the chance-up effect may not be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the effects performed when the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are moving in the end of the display area of the image display device 5 .

Also, in this example, since the chance-up effect can be executed a plurality of times, the number of times it has been executed may be recognized. For example, when the first chance-up effect is executed, an effect image simulating a blue flame is displayed at the end of the display area of the image display device 5, and when the second chance-up effect is executed, the effect image is displayed. When the effect image changes to green and the third chance-up effect is executed, the effect image may change to red. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the chance-up has been performed even after the chance-up effect is finished and the related effect image is erased.

Next, the keyhole (suggestion) image and the keyhole (substantial) image for each effect of the chance-up effect will be described. FIG. 8-20 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a keyhole (entity) image for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

As shown in FIG. 8-20, in this example, there are a plurality of types of effects to be targeted for the chance-up effect, and the display sizes of the effect images related to the respective effects are different. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-20 (1) and (3), the dialogue display has a smaller display size than the title display. In this example, the chance-up effect is executed in such a manner that the keyhole (entity) image is displayed at the position where the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-20, the display size of the keyhole (substantial) image is configured to vary according to the target rendering.

For example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the serif image 030IWG20 shown in FIG. The display size is smaller than the image 030IWG11. With such a configuration, the player can predict the target effect of the chance-up effect from the position where the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed, thereby improving the interest and target effect. By displaying the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 in a display size suitable for the display size, it is possible to produce a presentation that does not cause a sense of incongruity.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the keyhole image is materialized, the silhouette of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed in a common size regardless of the type of effect targeted for the chance-up effect. . After that, a keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed in a display size corresponding to the type of effect targeted for the chance-up effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the animation until the keyhole is materialized, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data related to effect control.

As described above, the characterizing portion 030IW discloses the configuration of the game machine shown in means 1 to 29 below.

(Means 1) A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and that suggests control to be in an advantageous state and has a plurality of different expectations depending on the performance mode. Types of suggestive effects (for example, effect of displaying title display in a predetermined mode, effect of displaying active display in a predetermined mode, dialogue effect of displaying dialogue display in a predetermined mode, display of decorative patterns in a predetermined mode) a special image display effect execution means capable of displaying a special image (for example, a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12), and a displayed special image. , a special effect (for example, changing the display color of the active display from normal color (white) to blue and a special effect executing means capable of executing a chance-up effect that changes to a normal image), and the special effect executing means displays a special corresponding image (for example, a keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11) when the suggestive effect is being executed. Then, a special effect is executed in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image (for example, the active display AH or the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the decoration pattern is displayed, and the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed. 8-15 (9) to (15), FIGS. 8-17 (9) to 8-18 (17), etc.). According to such a configuration, when a special effect using a special image is executed, the story related to the special image can be imparted to enhance the effect of the effect, thereby improving interest.

(Means 2) The special correspondence image is displayed at substantially the center position of the effect image related to the suggested effect being executed (see, for example, FIG. 8-12 (5) and FIG. 8-14 (7)), and the special correspondence image is displayed, a special effect for suggestive effects other than the suggestive effect corresponding to the special correspondence image is not executed (for example, at the timing when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, , The chance-up effect for dialogue display is not executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect, and to make the player pay attention to when the special corresponding image is displayed.

(Means 3) A special correspondence image can be displayed only once in response to the same suggestive effect (for example, a chance-up stimulating effect (or a chance (False)) is executed once, the chance-up boosting effect targeting the dialogue display is not executed again even if the dialogue display is displayed after that). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect.

(Means 4) When the effect mode of the suggestive effect changes due to the special effect, the effect mode after the change differs depending on the timing of the change (for example, the timing at which the chance-up effect is executed later is more advantageous (See Figures 8-3 and 8-8). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which timing the special performance will be executed, and to prevent the player who expects the changing timing from being disappointed.

(Means 5) A display stimulus effect executing means capable of executing a display stimulus effect (for example, a chance-up stimulus effect) for inciting whether or not the special corresponding image is displayed is provided, and the display stimulus effect executing means Regardless of the display position, it is possible to execute the display effect in a common manner (for example, FIGS. 8-14 (2) to (5), FIGS. 8-16 (2) to (5) As shown in FIG. 2, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is initially displayed up on the entire screen and then displayed in a common manner, even when the target effects are different). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the special correspondence image is displayed, that is, whether or not the special effect is executed, and also to pay attention to which suggestive effect is the target of the chance-up effect. can be made

(Means 6) When a special image is used in a special effect, it is displayed in a display size larger than that of the special corresponding image, and then displayed so as to act on the special corresponding image while being reduced (for example, FIG. 8- 15 (9) to (12), as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (9) to (12), the key image 030IWG12 moves from the front side of the screen toward the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 on the back side. Since it is displayed, it is initially displayed in a display size larger than the keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11, and then while being reduced (gradually becoming smaller as an expression of going away), it is stuck in the keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11. (displayed as rotating). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image acting on the special correspondence image, and to enhance the effect of the special presentation.

(Means 7) The special effect execution means can execute the special effect multiple times, and can vary the execution time according to the special effect to be executed (for example, in FIG. 8-4 (A) As shown, the chance-up effect for the decoration pattern has a longer effect execution time than the dialogue display or the chance-up effect for the dialogue display. can be executed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

(Means 8) The suggestive effect has a longer execution time when the effect mode changes due to the special effect than when the effect mode does not change due to the special effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) and (B) Thus, the effect execution time T11 of the dialogue effect in which the effect mode changes due to the chance-up effect is longer than the effect execution time T12 of the dialogue effect in which the effect mode does not change due to the chance-up effect). With such a configuration, when the special performance is executed, it is possible to secure a period during which the special performance and the suggestive performance targeted for the special performance are performed.

(Means 9) The suggestive effect executing means includes a first suggestive effect (for example, an effect of displaying a title display) and a second suggestive effect having a smaller display size than the first suggestive effect (for example, an effect of displaying dialogue). ), and the special effect executing means, when the suggestive effect is being executed, performs the special effect in a manner of displaying the special correspondence image at the position where the effect image related to the suggestive effect is displayed. It is executable (for example, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed at the position where the title image 030IWG21 is displayed or the position where the dialogue image 030IWG20 is displayed), and the suggestion effect to be the target of the special effect is the first suggestion. When it is the performance, the special correspondence image is displayed in the first display size corresponding to the display size of the first suggestion performance, and when it is the second suggestion performance, the special correspondence image is displayed in the display size of the second suggestion performance. The second display size is smaller than the first display size (for example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the serif image 030IWG20 shown in FIG. 8-20(3) is , smaller than the keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the title image 030IWG21 shown in FIG. 8-20(1)). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by enabling the player to predict the target suggestive effect from the position where the special correspondence image is displayed, and at the same time, the display size suitable for the target effect can be obtained. By displaying the special correspondence image on the screen, it is possible to achieve a production that does not cause a sense of incongruity.

(Means 10) Suggestive effect executing means provides a specific suggestive effect (for example, a effect of displaying dialogue) that displays a effect image at a first position, and a second position that is closer to the end of the display area of the display means than the first position. A special suggestive effect (for example, an effect of displaying a decorative pattern) in which the effect image is displayed at a position (for example, a position near the upper end of the display area of the image display device 5) can be executed, and the special effect executing means is a specified When the suggestive effect is executed, the special correspondence image is displayed at approximately the center position of the effect image displayed at the first position (for example, approximately at the center of the dialog image 030IWG20 as shown in FIG. (a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed at the position), and when the special suggestion effect is executed, the position shifted from the center position of the effect image displayed at the second position toward the center of the display area of the display means is specially handled. Display an image (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (7), display from the center position between the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R (the position corresponding to the middle decorative design display area 5C) A keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the area). With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display a special correspondence image according to the feature of the target suggestive effect.

(Means 11) The special effect includes a notification effect in which a special image is displayed at a common display position regardless of the position at which the special corresponding image is displayed to notify that the effect mode of the target suggestive effect changes (for example, , as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) and 8-17 (13), the character and the character display of "pending rank up" and "symbol rank up" are displayed). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the effect mode of the target suggestive effect changes due to the special effect.

(Means 12) The special correspondence image is not displayed at the timing when the effect mode of the suggestive effect to be targeted in the special effect changes (for example, FIGS. 8-15 (13) to (15), FIGS. As shown in FIG. 8-18 (17), the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is not displayed at the timing when the mode of active display or decorative pattern changes). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the effect mode of the suggestive effect changes.

(Means 13) The special image display means displays the special image in a manner of moving past the display position of the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect during a period before the special effect is executed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-12 (1) to (4) and FIGS. 8-19 (1) to (2), the dialogue The mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 move so as to pass through the position where the speech image related to the effect is displayed (or the position where the display is scheduled). With such a configuration, when the special image is displayed in a moving manner, the player's expectation that the special performance targeting the suggestive performance of the position where the special image is displayed is executed. It can enhance interest and improve interest.

(Means 14) When a special image is used, the special image display means moves and displays the special image to the display position of the target suggestive effect (for example, FIG. 8-14 (5), FIG. 8-16 ( 5), the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 move to the display position of the active display AH or the decoration pattern display area, which is the target of the chance-up effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the special effect and the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect.

(Means 15) The special image has a lower display priority than the effect image related to the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (14) and 8-19 (2), The mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 have a lower display priority than the title display, the active display, the dialogue display, and the decoration pattern, and are displayed in a lower layer than them). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the suggestive effect.

(Means 16) The special effect executing means can execute another special effect targeting another suggestive effect after executing one special effect targeting one suggestive effect, and the other special effect is , one special effect is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, a chance-up effect with a different target is executed after a predetermined period of time has passed). With such a configuration, it is possible to leave an interval between one special effect and another special effect to make each of them stand out, and to secure a period during which the special image is displayed in a moving manner.

(Means 17) The speed at which the special image is moved and displayed is faster when the suggestive effect to be used is specified than when the suggestive effect to be used is not specified (for example, As shown in FIGS. 8-19 (2) and (3), the movement speeds of the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 are slow movement when the effect to be used is not specified. is fast when you are on it). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the target suggestive effect.

(Means 18) When the special image is moved and displayed, the additional image is added, the additional image is also moved and displayed, and the additional image operates when the special effect is executed (for example, FIG. 8-14 ( 1) to (8), FIGS. 8-16 (1) to (8), and FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini character A image 030IWC10 is moved and displayed together with the mini key image 030IWG10, and the chance-up effect is performed. When executed, the character A image 030IWC10 throws the key image 030IWG12 into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image and enhance the effect of the special presentation.

(Means 19) The special image is displayed in a manner of moving around the additional image, and the movement is stopped when the special effect is executed (for example, FIGS. 8-14 (1) to (6), FIG. As shown in 8-16 (1) to (6) and FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10, and a chance-up effect is executed. sometimes it stops working). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image and enhance the effect of the special presentation.

(Means 20) The special image and the additional image are displayed during execution of a specific effect (for example, super reach) suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state, and have a higher display priority than the effect image related to the specific effect. Displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-12 (1) to (4), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 have a higher display priority than the character images related to the outpost production in the first half of Super Reach). ), and when the specific effect is being executed and the special effect is not being executed, at least the central part of the effect image related to the specific effect is displayed so as not to hinder the visibility (for example, FIG. 8 -12 (1) to (4), as shown in FIG. It is displayed so as to move the part, and is not displayed superimposed on the face etc. of the character image related to the outpost production). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special image and the additional image from interfering with the specific effect while displaying the special image and the additional image.

(Means 21) Suggesting that a special effect will be executed, a first special suggestive effect (for example, a chance-up fanning effect (true)) in which the special effect is executed after the effect, and suggesting that the special effect will be executed. and a special suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a second special suggestive effect (for example, a chance-up fanning effect (false)) in which the special effect is not executed after the effect, and the special image is provided with the second special suggestive effect executed. After that, it is displayed again in the initial position (for example, after the chance-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1), and as shown in FIG. 8-19 (5), the chance-up effect is displayed (false) is executed and appears in the common initial position). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the second special suggestive effect has ended, and to express the meaning of the restart. Moreover, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data related to effect control by redisplaying at the initial position.

(Means 22) The special effect executing means can execute the special effect a plurality of times, and when executing one special effect targeting one suggestive effect, another A special effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, a chance-up effect with a different target is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the special performance being executed.

(Means 23) A rendering image (for example, a decoration pattern) related to at least a part of the suggestive rendering out of a plurality of types of suggestive rendering has display priority over the special image even when the special image acts on the special correspondence image. high degree (see, for example, Fig. 8-15 (9)). With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the visibility of some suggestive effects in any situation. In addition, for effect images other than some suggestive effects (for example, those that are not information related to the progress of the game, such as dialogue display and title display), when the special image acts on the special corresponding image, Also, by lowering the display priority, it is possible to realize a more realistic presentation and enhance the presentation effect.

(Means 24) The special effect executing means can display a specific image when executing the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. The effect image that covers the effect image related to the character and the text display of "pending rank up" and "pattern rank up" are displayed), and the effect mode of the suggestive effect to be targeted when the specific image is displayed The first effect pattern to be changed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (13) to 8-18 (17), the appearance of the decorative pattern changes while the character and the "symbol rank up" display remain. pattern), and a second effect pattern (for example, as shown in FIGS. , a pattern in which the mode of the active display changes after the character and the display of "pending rank up" are erased), special effects can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation changes by displaying the specific image, and to suitably execute the special presentation according to the presentation pattern corresponding to the suggested presentation to be targeted. can do.

(Means 25) The degree of expectation that the special effect is controlled to be in an advantageous state is higher when the special effect is executed according to the first effect pattern than when the special effect is executed according to the second effect pattern (for example, the mode of decoration pattern The chance-up effect in which the active display mode changes has a higher expectation for a big hit than the chance-up effect in which the mode of the active display changes (see FIG. 8-7). With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied according to the showiness of the production pattern, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 26) As the specific image, it is possible to specify which of the suggestive effects the effect mode has changed, and an image different from the effect image related to the suggestive effect is displayed (for example, FIG. 8-15 (13 ), as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13), the character display of "pending rank up" or "symbol rank up" is displayed). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize which of the suggestive effects the effect mode has changed.

(Means 27) The special effect is executed during the execution of a specific effect (for example, super reach) that suggests whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state, and the specific image displayed during the execution of the special effect is the specific effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), the effect image that covers the effect image related to the outpost production is displayed in a manner that covers the effect image. ” and “symbol rank up” are displayed), and the suggestive effect includes a suggestive effect that is hidden by the specific image and a suggestive effect that is not hidden by the specific image (for example, FIG. 8-15 While the active display AH is covered as shown in (13), the decoration pattern is not covered as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13)). The degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state is higher than the suggestive performance to be hidden (for example, the chance-up performance in which the mode of decoration pattern changes is higher than the chance-up performance in which the mode of active display changes). (see Figure 8-7). With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied according to the flashiness of the special presentation, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 28) The special effect of the first effect pattern is executed at a later timing within one variable display period at a higher rate than the special effect of the second effect pattern. The changing chance-up effect is executed later than the chance-up effect in which the mode of active display changes (see FIG. 8-3). With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special effect according to the time when the player's expectations are high.

(Means 29) When the special effect is being executed by the first effect pattern, one specific image is switched to another specific image and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (13) to (14) 8-17(15) to 8-18(17), an image of character A and character B standing side by side is displayed). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the highly anticipated special production.

Moreover, it is preferable to provide a plurality of types of suggestive effects and execute them at various timings. For example, as a variable display pattern, a pseudo-running pattern that is temporarily stopped and then variably displayed again is provided, and a special effect is executed in which a second suggestive effect is executed in which the effect mode is changed using a special image at various timings of the pseudo-running pattern. You may By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the suggestive effect. Detailed control on this point will be described in more detail.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 9 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 11). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 9, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 has a special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 11), and the special prize winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special prize winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 9, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 9), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 11).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 11).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

10 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running or during the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Incidentally, the "loss" in the pachinko game machine 1 includes a "time-saving loss" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time-saving state) without going through the big win game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. 11, for example. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing of a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 .

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S903). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S903; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S904), the setting confirmation process (step S905) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S903; No), after executing the initialization process (step S906), the setting change process (step S907) is executed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being off is satisfied in step S903. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S905, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop display of the winning symbols or the like, or display corresponding to the game stop state different from the losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S907, the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the setting is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is ON, the initialization process of step S906 and step S906 are executed. The setting change process of S907 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed together with the recovery process of step S904 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S904 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the register of CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S909), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9010 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 13 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110, and It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 13 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled in the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 15 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 15(A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 15 (A), when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1 and when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. It should be noted that when the set value of the first special figure is 2 to 6 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 15(A).

As shown in FIG. 15 (B), when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1 and when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. In addition, for the case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 15 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to "big hit" or "loss with time reduction" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, common While only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the jackpot determination values. A number within the range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value (1020 to 1346) of the previous set value 6, with 65317 as the reference value of the loss with time reduction (reference value with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65535 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. Set to a common numeric range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot determination values, the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation determination value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 65317 as a reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65425 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. set in the range. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as those of the first special figure display result determination table.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the set value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set in the common numerical range with time reduction and the deviation is the second special symbol, when the game state is the normal state and the time reduction state, the set value Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range for time saving. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is not with the time saving is a common rate for any set value, so the gambling property depending on the set value can be prevented from becoming excessively high. In addition, for time-saving loss to which a common judgment value number is assigned for each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving loss reference value, in any setting value, variable display It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination of the result as being out of time saving.

In this pachinko game machine 1, the number of setting values that can be set is 6 from 1 to 6, but the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Also, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 17 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 18, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S90175 described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S90175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of characteristic portion 193SG in the embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characteristic portion 193SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 193SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

The game machine of form 1 is
A plurality of types of performance identification information (for example, decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous patterns) are variably displayed to derive and display display results, and an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. state) controllable gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
As the variable display, a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 18);
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect (for example, temporary stop suggestive effect) suggesting that the specific effect identification information will temporarily stop part) and
A notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the specific effect identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
with
The suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and then the first low visibility state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 19-33 and 19-34, in the image display device 5, the concentration lines are reduced to the density D1. After lowering the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns by displaying the central lines with a density of D2, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced),
The notification effect execution means is capable of executing, as the notification effect, an effect in which effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information is rendered invisible (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-34 and 19-35 , a portion where the left and right decoration patterns are rendered invisible by displaying the effect image for notifying the temporary stop in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display is performed for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. Continuous display is possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5 also the part where the saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and to increase the excitement of the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and to increase the temporary stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made and the player's disappointment at the fact that the temporary stop was not made. Since the feeling can be softened, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine of form 2 is
A game machine (e.g., pachinko game) capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decoration patterns) to derive and display display results, and control to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state) for the player. machine 1),
As the variable display, special identification information (for example, pseudo-continuous pattern) different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed. a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 18) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) for restarting the variable display later;
Suggestive effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the special identification information will temporarily stop (for example, a temporary stop suggestive effect) executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
A notification effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) for notifying that the special identification information has temporarily stopped executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. part) and
with
The suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the suggestive effect, and then increases the visibility further than the first low visibility state. It is possible to execute an effect that lowers to a low second low visibility state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-33 and 19-34, the image display device 5 displays concentrated lines with a density D1 to After reducing the visibility of the decoration pattern, the visibility of the left and right decoration patterns is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines with a density of D2),
The notification effect execution means can execute an effect that makes the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-34 and 19-35, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, the effect display is continued for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing. It can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-44, if the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, even after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5 The part where the saturated lines are continuously displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the temporary stop by the suggestive effect, and to increase the excitement of the temporary stop by executing the notification effect, and to increase the temporary stop. If not, the effect display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize that the temporary stop was not made and the player's disappointment at the fact that the temporary stop was not made. Since the feeling can be softened, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine of form 3 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the suggestive effect execution means is configured to temporarily stop the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) in the case of temporary stop. moving the effect display toward the position (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-48 as modification 193SG-1, the part where the concentration line is moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5),
The gaming machine according to mode 1 or mode 2, characterized by:
According to this feature, since the predetermined position can be specified by the effect display, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) did not temporarily stop.

The game machine of form 4 is
The effect display has higher transparency after the predetermined timing than before the predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. Before the switching timing, the saturated lines are displayed with the density D2, and after the display image data switching timing, the saturated lines are displayed with the density D1. The part where the left and right decorative patterns are more visible after the switching timing of the image data),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 3, characterized by:
According to this feature, the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is not temporarily stopped by increasing the transparency of the effect display after the predetermined timing when the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is temporarily stopped. By making the player aware of this fact and increasing attention to the background image that is easy to see through the effect display, the game against the fact that the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) did not temporarily stop It can ease a person's frustration.

The game machine of form 5 is
The suggestive effect execution means places the effect display at a predetermined position where the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops, Any effect identification information (or effect identification information) that is different from the specific effect identification information is erased before it is stopped and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. , in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, the concentration line is hidden before the decorative patterns of numbers other than "1", which is a combination of big hits, or "1", which is a combination of losers, stop. part),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 4, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stop of the effect identification information from being mistaken for the temporary stop.

The game machine of form 6 is
When the notification effect is executed, the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-35 (G) to 19-35 (H) 2, the part where the pseudo-ream pattern is cracked and explodes),
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops, at a effect position (for example, the first effect position) that overlaps at least a part of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) An operable movable body (for example, a second movable body 193SG033) is provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 5, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to further impress the player that the game has been temporarily stopped by the action of the movable body and the deformation of the specific effect identification information (or special identification information).

The game machine of form 7 is
The movable body is
The area overlapping the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is smaller than that of the first action (for example, moving from the retreat position shown in FIG. 19-2 to the first effect position) and the first action. It is possible to perform a second action (for example, moving from the retracted position to the second effect position shown in FIG. 19-2),
In the notification effect, the first action is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-35 (F), the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position during the temporary stop notification effect. ),
The gaming machine according to mode 6, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to impress the player that the game has been temporarily stopped while preventing the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) from becoming difficult to see due to the movable body.

The game machine of form 8 is
The movable body has a light-emitting part capable of emitting light (for example, the second movable body LED193SG034),
In the first operation, the light emitting unit emits light in a manner corresponding to the effect display (for example, as shown in Modification 193SG-2, the second movable body LED 193SG034 is temporarily stopped during the temporary stop notification effect. The part that emits light in the color of the concentration line displayed in the suggestive effect),
The gaming machine according to mode 7, characterized by:
According to this feature, since the light-emitting section emits light in a mode corresponding to the effect display, the presentation effect can be improved.

The game machine of form 9 is
The first action of the movable body ends before the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is erased (for example, FIGS. 19-35 (F) and 19-35 (G) 2, the part where the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the first effect position to the retracted position before the pseudo-continuous pattern is hidden on the image display device 5),
The gaming machine according to Mode 7 or Mode 8, characterized by:
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is erased.

The game machine of form 10 is
When the notification effect is executed, the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-35 (G) to 19-35 (H) 2, the part where the pseudo-ream pattern is cracked and explodes),
After the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped, display corresponding to the specific effect (for example, display of “x2”, “x3”, “x4”, etc.) suggesting that the N+1th variable display will be executed. Display means corresponding to a specific effect that can be displayed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 18),
a movable body (for example, a second movable body 193SG033) that can move to an effect position (for example, a first effect position) that overlaps at least part of the specific effect corresponding display displayed by the specific effect corresponding display means;
comprising
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 9, characterized by:
According to this feature, the action of the movable body can increase attention to the display corresponding to the specific effect, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

The game machine of form 11 is
The movable body has a light-emitting part capable of emitting light (for example, the second movable body LED193SG034),
The light-emitting unit emits light in a manner corresponding to the display corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as the first variable display start count notification effect, blue when displaying "x2", and blue when displaying "x3") is green, and when displaying "x 4", the second movable body LED 193SG034 is illuminated in red),
The gaming machine according to mode 10, characterized by:
According to this feature, since the light emitting section emits light in a mode corresponding to the display corresponding to the different variable display, it is possible to encourage attention to the display corresponding to the specific effect, thereby improving the effect of the effect.

The game machine of form 12 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop after the suggestive effect is executed, the special effect (for example, the part where the temporary stop suggestive image is displayed in the central part of the image display device 5) (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 18),
with
When the suggestive effect is executed, the effect display of the suggestive effect is displayed prior to the variable display of the effect identification information during the suggestive effect (for example, instead of the normal decorative pattern, a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed. A portion that is moved and displayed from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5),
The special effect executing means, as the special effect, the first effect period until the predetermined timing (for example, FIG. 19- 33, the period before the display image data switching timing in the temporary stop suggesting effect) and the predetermined position because the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) did not temporarily stop at the predetermined timing. (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-33, the period after the display image data switching timing in the temporary stop suggestion effect), and the effect related to the transition can be executed (for example, As shown in FIGS. 19-33, 19-35, and 19-44, the central portion of the image display device 5 displays a temporary stop suggesting image while displaying a concentration line),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 11, characterized by:
According to this feature, the display control in the suggestive effect becomes easy, and the special effect makes the transition to the second effect period unnatural when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop. You can prevent it from getting lost.

The game machine of form 13 is
The special effect execution means, as the special effect, the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stopped at the predetermined position, the second effect at a position different from the predetermined position It is possible to execute an effect that overlaps and displays the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) in a translucent state at a position corresponding to the period (for example, a temporary stop suggestion image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 is displayed),
The gaming machine according to mode 12, characterized by:
According to this feature, the transition to the second presentation period can be made more natural.

The game machine of form 14 is
The image display means is capable of synthesizing and displaying displays drawn on a plurality of drawing layers (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-3 and 19-4, image data 1, image data 2, image Data 3 and data drawn as image data 4 are synthesized and displayed on the image display device 5),
A drawing layer in which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the effect display of the special effect are drawn is different from a drawing layer in which the effect display of the suggestive effect is drawn (for example, FIG. 19-3 , a temporary stop suggesting image is drawn as image data 1, a decoration pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern is drawn as image data 2, and a concentration line is drawn as image data 4),
The gaming machine according to mode 12 or 13, characterized by:
According to this feature, the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) and the effect display of the special effect can be drawn separately from the effect display of the suggestive effect. ) and the degree of freedom of special effects can be increased.

The game machine of form 15 is
When the notification effect is executed, it is possible to execute an effect that the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is deformed and then moved and erased (for example, FIG. 19-35 (G ) to Figures 19-35(H), 19-36(I), and 19-36(J), after the simulated consecutive symbols are cracked and exploded, they are moved and displayed toward the player side. the part that is hidden by
After the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is erased, a display corresponding to a specific effect (for example, "x2", "x3", " × 4” etc.) can be displayed (for example, the part for performing the variable display during variable display processing shown in FIG. 18 by the performance control CPU 120).
The specific effect corresponding display means can move and erase the specific effect corresponding display (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part that is hidden after moving toward the player side),
The effect identification information in the N+1th variable display becomes visible after the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is erased and before the display corresponding to the specific effect is erased (for example, FIG. As shown in 19-37(O), when "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. are displayed on the image display device 5, left and right decoration patterns are visible to the player. part),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 14, characterized by:
According to this feature, the effect of the notification effect and the display corresponding to the specific effect can be enhanced, and since the effect identification information can be visually recognized before the display corresponding to the specific effect is erased, the variable display can be restarted. can be easily recognized by the player.

The game machine of form 16 is
A notice effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. part),
The advance notice effect executing means limits the execution of the notice effect when the display corresponding to the specific effect is erased (for example, as shown in Modified Example 193SG-3, the first variable display start count notification effect is " When the display of "x2", "x3", and "x4" is moved and displayed (enlarged display) toward the player side, the part that limits the execution of the notice effect),
The gaming machine according to mode 15, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes difficult to easily recognize that the variable display is restarted due to the execution of the advance notice effect.

The game machine of form 17 is
Both the movement of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the specific effect corresponding display are movements toward the direction of the player who is playing the game (for example, the pseudo consecutive symbols explode and the game A portion where the display is moved toward the player side, and a portion where the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. is moved and displayed toward the player side),
The gaming machine according to mode 15 or mode 16, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the impression given to the player and improve the performance effect.

The game machine of form 18 is
A special effect that makes it difficult to see the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stopped by displaying a special image after the notification effect is executed (for example, the blast shown in modification 193SG-4 a portion that displays a visibility-impairing image such as an image) (for example, a portion that the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 18);
The specific effect executing means makes the display corresponding to the resumption of the variable display visible after the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is made invisible by the special effect (for example, modification 193SG -4, a portion that executes re-variable display after hiding the visibility-impairing image),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 17, characterized by:
According to this feature, before the display including the effect identification information corresponding to the restart of the variable display is started, a special effect is executed in which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) becomes difficult to see. It is possible to make it easy to understand that the variable display is restarted.

The game machine of form 19 is
an image display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying the variable display of the effect identification information and the effect display of each effect;
A plate member provided on the player side of the image display means and having transparency so that the display of the image display means can be visually recognized by the player, and the special image can be displayed by introducing light from the outer peripheral side surface. a light guide plate (for example, the light guide plate shown in Modification 193SG-4);
with
In the special effect, the special effect executing means makes the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) displayed on the image display means invisible by displaying the special image on the light guide plate. (For example, as shown in Modification 193SG-4, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the visibility impeding image is displayed on the light guide plate so that the player can see the pseudo consecutive symbols displayed on the image display device 5. part that is difficult to see),
The gaming machine according to mode 18, characterized by:
According to this feature, since the special image is displayed on the light guide plate, the player's impression can be enhanced, so that the effect of the special presentation can be enhanced.

The game machine of form 20 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) before the predetermined timing is Different from the moving speed of the effect identification information (or the special identification information) (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-33, the moving speed of the pseudo continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is V1, The part where the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern after the data switching timing is V3),
19. The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 19, characterized by:
According to this feature, the player can easily grasp whether the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is before or after the predetermined timing of the temporary stop.

The game machine of form 21 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stops, the moving speed of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) to the predetermined position of the temporary stop before the predetermined timing is The specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) passing through the predetermined position after the predetermined timing is different from the moving speed when returning to the predetermined position (for example, as shown in modification 193SG-5, a pseudo Even if the continuous pattern does not temporarily stop at the central portion of the image display device 5, the pseudo continuous pattern once starts moving downward of the image display device 5 and then returns to the central portion of the image display device 5. In this case, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing and the center of the image display device 5 after once passing through the center of the image display device 5 are set. The part that changes the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern when returning to the part),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 20, characterized by:
According to this feature, the player can easily grasp whether the movement is before passing the predetermined position or the movement back after passing.

The game machine of form 22 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the predetermined position returns to the predetermined position, the suggestive effect execution means regulates the display of the effect display (for example, modification 193SG As shown in -5, when the pseudo continuous pattern once returns to the center of the image display device 5 after passing through the center of the image display device 5, the part where the concentration line is not displayed again),
The gaming machine according to mode 21, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to make it easier to understand that the movement is returning after passing by.

The game machine of form 23 is
When the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, the moving speed before the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped is the specified speed after the temporary stop. Different from the movement speed at which the effect identification information (or the special identification information) moves (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-34, the moving speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols before the temporary stop timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols However, the moving speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols is V2),
19. The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 19, characterized by:
According to this feature, the player can easily grasp whether the movement is before the temporary stop or after the temporary stop.

The game machine of form 24 is
The movement direction of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) before the temporary stop is different from the movement direction of the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) after the temporary stop (for example, , As shown in FIGS. 19-34 and 19-35, the pseudo-continuous symbols before the temporary stop move downward, but the pseudo-continuous symbols after the temporary stop move toward the player side (front side). the part that moves with the
The gaming machine according to mode 23, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to make it easier to understand that the vehicle is moving after the temporary stop, and to prevent misrecognition of the movement.

FIG. 19-1 is a configuration diagram showing a control board and the like in the characteristic portion 193SG. As shown in FIG. 19-1, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 193SG is provided with a second movable body 193SG033. The second movable body 193SG033 has a drive motor (not shown), and is operable under control of the drive motor by the effect control CPU 120 . Further, a second movable body LED 193SG034 for causing the second movable body 193SG033 to emit light is built in the second movable body 193SG033. In addition, the second movable body LED193SG034 is connected to the lamp control board 14 .

As shown in FIG. 19-2(A), the second movable body 193SG033 during non-operation is arranged at a position below the image display device 5 (retracted position) between the image display device 5 and the game board 2. ing. At the retracted position, most of the second movable body 193SG033 is hidden by the game board 2, so that it is difficult for the player to see the second movable body 193SG033.

The second movable body 193SG033 in the present characteristic portion 193SG is shown in FIG. It operates upward from the retracted position shown in (A).

Of these, when the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect are executed, as shown in FIG. While moving (moving) to the first effect position, which is the front position, when executing the big hit notification in the reach effect of super reach, as shown in FIG. 19-2 (C), the second movable body 193SG003 It moves (moves) from the retracted position to the second effect position which is the front position of the image display device 5 and which is above the first effect position.

Although not shown, the second movable body 193SG033 that has moved to the first effect position or the second effect position returns to the retracted position again from the first effect position or the second effect position after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. It's becoming

Furthermore, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, the second movable body 193SG moves from the retracted position to the first effect position during the temporary stop notification effect, so that a part of the pseudo continuous symbol overlaps with the pseudo continuous symbol when viewed from the front. (See Figure 19-35(F)). On the other hand, the case where the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the second effect position is limited only to the execution of the big hit notification during the super ready-to-win effect. That is, the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 from the retracted position to the first effect position is also an action in which the area overlapping the pseudo consecutive symbols is larger than that of the movement from the retracted position to the second effect position.

Next, the display control section 123 in the characteristic section 193SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 can cause the image display device 5 to display a predetermined image based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not to be displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. In the case of controlling so as not to display the image based on the data on the performance screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 which created the display data not arranging the image data of the prescribed image, the prescribed image is not displayed on the performance screen. may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. 19-3(A) to 19-3(D) and FIGS. 19-4(A) to 19-4(D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, , an image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 4. FIG. Among them, FIG. 19-3 shows the image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped as a temporary stop suggestion effect (see FIG. 19-35) in the present characteristic portion 193SG, and FIG. This is the image data when it did not stop.

As shown in FIG. 19-3(A), the image data 1 displays a pseudo-continuous symbol (this feature) in the central portion ("middle" decorative symbol display area 5C) of the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. This is data drawn to display a temporary stop suggesting image that suggests stopping (temporary stopping).

The pseudo-continuous symbol in the characteristic portion 193SG is a special symbol that is displayed on the image display device 5 only during a temporary stop suggesting effect or a temporary stop notification effect, which will be described later, as a part of the decorative symbol. It is a pattern in which a re-variable display (pseudo continuous effect) of the decoration pattern is executed by temporarily stopping the pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is a symbol different from the decoration symbol, and is displayed on the image display device 5 only during a temporary stop suggesting effect or a temporary stop notification effect, which will be described later. may be

Further, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, a form in which the pseudo consecutive symbols are a part of the decorative symbols and are displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion effect or the temporary stop notification effect is exemplified. The invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo-continuous symbol may be a symbol that is displayed as a part of the variable display together with the normal ornamental symbol during the temporary stop suggesting effect or the temporary stop notifying effect.

Furthermore, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is a pattern different from the decoration pattern, the normal decoration pattern (characteristic part "1" to "9" number patterns) is temporarily stopped at the central portion of the image display device 5. After that, a case may be provided in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed by changing the temporarily stopped decorative symbol to a pseudo-continuous symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 19-3(B) and 19-4(A), the image data 2 shows the above-described pseudo consecutive symbols directed downward from the top of the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. In addition to being data drawn to display the movement display of , immediately after the temporary stop suggesting effect is completed without the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopping, instead of the pseudo consecutive symbols, from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 This data is drawn to display a variable display of normal ornamental patterns (symbols "1" to "9" in this characterizing portion 193SG) toward the .

In the image data 2, when the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed, the ornamental symbols are displayed in the “left” and “right” ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the temporary stop suggesting effect is not executed. It is also the image data for displaying the variable display of the decorative design in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R at the time of execution.

As shown in FIG. 19-4(B), the image data 3 is a simulated image from the center portion of the image display device 5 toward the lower side immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the simulated continuous symbols temporarily stopping. This data is drawn to display the moving display of consecutive symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 19-3(C) and 19-4(C), the image data 4 is distributed from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion of the image display device 5 ("middle" decoration pattern display). This data is drawn to display a saturated line toward the area 5C).

As shown in FIGS. 19-3 and 19-4, these image data 1 to 4 are set with display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5. FIG. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. The display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. FIG. The lowest display priority is set for image data 4 (image display priority in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as the lower image than the image based on the image data 1, and the image based on the image data 3 is displayed. The image is displayed as a lower image than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 4 is displayed based on the image data 1, the image based on the image data 2, and the image data 3. It is designed to be displayed as an image in a lower layer than the image.

Although not shown, the image data in the characteristic portion 193SG includes image data 5 drawn to display a background image on the image display device 5 in addition to image data 1 to image data 4. . The display priority of the image data 5 is set lower than that of the image data 4 . That is, in the characteristic portion 193SG, among the images displayed on the image display device 5, the background image is displayed as the lowest layer data.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. The image based on the image data 1 (temporary stop suggesting image) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 4. As shown in FIG. 19-4(D), the image based on the image data 3 (from the center of the pseudo-continuous symbol to the The image based on the image data 4 (concentrated line) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (moving display toward the bottom), and the image based on the image data 2 (moving display from the top to the bottom of the decorative pattern) is displayed as the image data. The image based on the image data 3 and the image based on the image data 4 are preferentially displayed.

Incidentally, the transmittance of the concentrated line in this characteristic portion 193SG is set to be high (for example, 50%). For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 19-3(C) and 19-4(D), during execution of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the player can see decorative symbols, pseudo-continuous symbols, and temporary stop suggesting effects through the concentration line. The image is visible.

In particular, in this characteristic portion 193SG, during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbols are temporarily stopped. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) determines whether or not the pseudo continuous symbols temporarily stop at the start timing of the variable display in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect. The variable display is executed by setting image data to be stopped. Then, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) changes the image data to be displayed on the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing (see FIG. 19-33) of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped. The image data (FIG. 19-3) in which the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped is switched to the image data (FIG. 19-4) in which the pseudo-continuous pattern shown in FIG. 19-4 is not temporarily stopped.

FIG. 19-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this characterizing portion 193SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 19-5(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 19-5 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 19-5(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is "loss", "big win" or "minor win". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 19-5(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10") to be described later, Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result will be a "big hit" as a result of judgment at the time of winning, the judgment result of the big hit type (probable variation, non-probability variation, or sudden probability) and whether it will be a small hit. is. In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 19-5(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 19-6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 19-6, in this characteristic portion 193SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby setting the random numbers MR1 to MR4. You may make it count the numerical data which show a part.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 19-7 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this characterizing portion 193SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 193SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 193SG, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 193SG), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state becomes high (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 193SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 19-7 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 193SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 193SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 19-8(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 193SG selects any of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot gaming state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, the jackpot type in the present characteristic portion 193SG will be described with reference to FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and shift to a high probability high base state, and high probability low base state in which high probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time saving control is not executed. There are set a "probability variable big hit C" to shift and a "non-probability variable big hit" to shift to a low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . In addition, the big win game state by the "non-probability variable big win" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . Therefore, the "variable probability big hit A" may be called a 10 round (10R) variable probability big hit, and the "variable probability big hit B" may be called a 5 round (5R) probability variable big hit. Furthermore, in the big-hit game based on the "probability-variable big-hit C", two rounds (so-called two rounds) of changing the special variable winning-ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated, and a special It is a high-speed opening jackpot in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 seconds). In addition, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, the variable probability control and the time saving control are not executed.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 193SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is the same as the probability variable big win C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this characteristic portion 193SG). In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

In other words, in this characteristic portion 193SG, when it is determined to be "variable probability big hit C" or "small hit", variable display is executed with the same variation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 19-9) In addition, as a result of the variable display, the chance number is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same. Since it is impossible to distinguish whether it is a ``variable probability big win C'' in which the variable probability control is executed or a ``minor win'' in which the previous game state is continued without executing the variable probability control, the variable probability big win C cannot be distinguished. After the end of the big win game or the small win game, the game can be continued while making the player expect that the variable probability control is executed.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the variable probability big win A and the variable probability big win B are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the regenerated big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 193SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-8 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable jackpot A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which there are few prize balls to be obtained is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-8 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 19-9 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 193SG. In this characteristic portion 193SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Although two types of normal reach variation patterns are provided in the present characteristic portion 193SG, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided, or one normal reach variation pattern may be provided. Only the type may be used. Moreover, even in the super reach variation pattern, a plurality of super reach variation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . may be provided.

In addition, the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 193SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 19-9, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 193SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation pattern in the characteristic portion 193SG includes a variation pattern in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and re-variably displayed during variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during variable display. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display is set to have a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Furthermore, as for the super reach variation pattern in the characteristic portion 193SG, there are a variation pattern in which pseudo-continuous effects are performed twice during variable display, and a variation pattern in which pseudo-continuous effects are performed three times during variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display. .

In addition, in this characteristic portion 193SG, since it is set so that the variable display result is "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, the degree of expectation of big hit becomes higher, so in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

That is, regarding the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in the present characteristic portion 193SG, the greater the number of simulated continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the expected degree of big hit.

Further, in the present characteristic unit 193SG, as will be described later, the type of the variation pattern is determined first, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

FIG. 19-10 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 193SG. In this characteristic part 193SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is varied according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-10, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is used to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of one-time jackpot of normal reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-3 (variation pattern of two-time jackpot of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-4 (super Reach pseudo continuous performance 3 times big hit variation pattern). Also, if the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table B to set the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) Variation pattern), PB1-2 (Normal reach pseudo continuous effect 1 time big hit variation pattern), PB1-3 (Normal reach pseudo continuous effect 2 times big hit variation pattern), PB1-4 (Normal reach pseudo continuous effect 3 times big hit variation pattern) ).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 19-10, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table B have different decision ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1- 4 is determined at a rate of 45%. That is, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, the variable display result is determined to be the super reach variation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. It's becoming Furthermore, focusing on the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, more pseudo-continuous effects are performed during the variable display than when the variable display result is the non-probable variable jackpot. easier to implement. Therefore, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect.

Also, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). That is, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, the variable display is performed in the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variable big hit C or the small hit, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable probability big win C or a small win.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time loss variation pattern ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 Determined from (shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss) and PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic portion 193SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure Since the rate of execution of variable display increases due to the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variation time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

The RAM 102 in the characteristic portion 193SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A, and although the start prize (first start prize) has occurred, the special figure that has not yet been started It stores the pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern reservation storage part stores the reservation information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.例文帳に追加For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting section. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. Area 193SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 193SG190 shown in FIG. 19-11(A) includes a production control flag setting unit 193SG191, a production control timer setting unit 193SG192, a production control counter setting unit 193SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 193SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 193SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 193SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 193SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 193SG192 stores the data indicating the timer value in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 193SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 193SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 193SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing portion 193SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 193SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory Corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ”) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A are these starting entrance winning designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command, A storage area (entry) is reserved for storing the number of pending memories notification command in association with the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. , and the storage contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable display. It is designed to be cleared in the waiting process per special figure that is executed when ending the.

Furthermore, in the startup winning command buffer 193SG194A of the characterizing portion 193SG, whether or not the display pattern has not been determined in accordance with the determination of whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the pre-reading notice setting process (FIG. 15). Or, in other words, due to the occurrence of a new start winning prize, the display pattern determination is undecided due to the newly stored starting entrance winning designation command, pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and pending memory number notification command. A display undecided flag indicating a, a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display is set, and a first special figure pending memory and a second special figure pending memory Each corresponding to A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with the buffer number.

In addition, in the reception command buffer 193SG194A at the time of start winning of this characteristic part 193SG, a storage area so that the effect limit flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage is secured for each storage area (entry). In addition, the effect limit flag means that in the command analysis process (Fig. 19-18), the start winning occurred at the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, but the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, the number of reserved memories This is a flag indicating that the entry is not subject to the pre-reading notice effect when the notification command is not received within a first reserved storage number notification waiting time or a second reserved storage number notification waiting time, which will be described later.

If execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process to be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display pattern of the reserved memory display is stored in the reserved display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, When the execution of the reading notice effect is determined, a special mode different from the normal display mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the pending memory display "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) is set, the reserved memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U. , and in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display, it is announced that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the smallest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage of the receiving command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning (the entry with the youngest buffer number). go. At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and reserved storage number notification command.

19-11(B), the commands stored in the start-winning-time reception command buffer 193SG194A shown in FIG. Entry number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") corresponding to the pending storage of the starting variable display is deleted. -1”) and the storage contents of the entries after the pending storage of the starting variable display are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 19-11 (B), when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands shifted and stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing section 193SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 13 will be described based on FIGS. 19-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 193SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 193SGS101; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 193SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, it should be able to specify the number of the 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 193SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 193SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "1" (step 193 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 193SGS101 (step 193SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit in step 193SGS102 (step 193SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( step 193 SGS 104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 193SGS104; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 193SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value which is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, it is sufficient if it can specify the number of second special figure reservation memory. In step 193SGS105, when the number of second special figure pending storage is not the upper limit (step 193SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "2" (step 193 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 193SGS103 and step 193SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the starting opening buffer value which is the stored value of the starting opening buffer is updated so as to add 1 (step 193SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting buffer value is "2", the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 193SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting section, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 193SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for the fluctuation pattern determination and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (step 193 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 193SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start buffer value is "2", the first Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the 2 special figure reservation storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 193 SGS109 to extract numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 193SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 193SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for transmitting the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the processing of step 193SGS111, a winning random number value determination processing is executed (step 193SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 193SGS113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this manner is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 193SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 193SGS114; N), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS116). End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 19-13(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step 193SGS112 of FIG. 19-13 as the winning random number determination processing. In this characteristic portion 193SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 13, FIGS. 19-14) to be described later is performed. result) is regarded as "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control to the big hit game state. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 13, FIGS. 19-15), which will be described later, determination of variation patterns that specifically define the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at the time of winning in step 193SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 19-13 (A), the CPU 103 first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit etc., Pachinko game machine 1 (step 193SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability flag is on when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that the time saving state is when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are specified. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 193SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 19-7 is selected and set (step 193SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 193SGS109 in FIG. 19-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 193SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the processing of step 193 SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each determination It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the jackpot determination range in step 193SGS123, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not hit the jackpot (step 193SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 19-7 2 is selected and set (step 193SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 193SGS109 in FIG. 19-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 193SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 193 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command according to the result (step 193SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 193SGS127), and proceed to step 193SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designated command (step 193SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 193 SGS 129). If the time saving flag is off (step 193SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 193SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 193SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to these fluctuation pattern determination table A and deviation pattern determination table D, the characteristic portion 193SG includes a deviation pattern determination table B that is used when the number of pending memories is 3. , A deviation variation pattern determination table C that is used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance. , For example, 498 (approximately 50%) determination values from 0 to 497 out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the non-reach variation pattern are assigned, and the deviation variation pattern In the determination table B, 598 (about 60%) determination values from 0 to 597 out of the range that the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take for the non-reach variation pattern are assigned. In the fluctuation pattern determination table C, 698 (approximately 70%) judgment values from 0 to 697 are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns in the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for deviation, 100 (about 10%) judgment values from 898 to 997 out of the range that the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment can take for the super reach fluctuation pattern is assigned.

Therefore, in step 193SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

In addition, when it is determined in step 193SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a big hit will occur during variable display (step 193SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 19-13(A) , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 193 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for judging big hit types, it is judged which of the plurality of types the big hit type is judged to be.

Also, the symbol designation command according to the determined big hit type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit A, the third symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation big hit B, and the probability variation big hit C in the case of the probability variation big hit C Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, executes the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 193 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variable jackpot (Step 193 SGS 134a). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 193SGS135), and step Go to 193SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not the non-probability variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether the determined jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B (step 193SGS134b).

If the determined jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B (step 193 SGS 134b; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 193SGS136), go to step 193SGS138.

When the judged jackpot type is not the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B (step 193 SGS134b; N), that is, when the judged jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot C, a special winning variation pattern judgment table is selected and set. (step 193SGS137) and proceeds to step 193SGS138.

After executing any of the processing of step 193SGS127, step 193SGS130, step 193SGS131, step 193SGS135, step 193SGS136, and step 193SGS137, each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is used to determine a variation category according to the range of determination values including the random number MR3 (step 193SGS138). In this characteristic portion 193SG, as shown in FIG. 19-13 (B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", regardless of the total number of pending memories, the "non-reach" variable display mode is common. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode (for example, normal reach) other than "non-reach" and "super reach" A variable category of "other" is provided, It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 193SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 193SGS132), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

FIG. 19-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 14 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIGS. 19-14, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 193SGS141). The number of second special symbol pending storage is the number of pending storage of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 193SGS141, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

In step 193SGS141, when the second special figure pending storage number is other than "0" (step 193SGS141; N), the second special figure pending storage unit holds data stored corresponding to the holding number "1" As such, the numerical data representing the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 193SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 193 SGS142, by subtracting 1 from the second special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value and updating the count value, subtract 1 from the second special figure pending memory number and the total pending memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data of the second special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" in the second special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 193SGS143).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 193SGS144), it moves to step 193SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending storage number is "0" at step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; Y), it is determined whether or not the first special figure pending storage number is "0" (step 193SGS145). . The number of first special figure reserved storage is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 193SGS145, the game control counter setting unit reads out the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. Thus, the process of step 193SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special figure pending storage number is "0" in step 193SGS141, and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Determine whether or not As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, the special game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure. Execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

When the first special figure pending storage number is other than "0" at step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; N), the pending data stored corresponding to the pending number "1" in the first special figure pending storage unit As such, the numerical data representing the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination are read out (step 193SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a variable random number buffer.

Subsequent to the processing of step 193 SGS146, by subtracting 1 from the 1st special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value and updating it, etc., subtract 1 from the 1st special figure pending memory number and the total pending memory number Update so as to allow, and update the data in the first special figure reservation storage unit. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" in the first special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") are shown. The pending data is shifted upward by one entry (step 193SGS147).

Then, after updating the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer to "1" (step 193SGS148), it moves to step 193SGS149.

In step 193 SGS149, as a use table for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or a "loss", the special symbol display result determination shown in FIG. 19-7 is used. Select and set Table 1. Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit" or "loss" , determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or a "loss" (step 193SGS150a). In addition, in this step 193SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (variable probability state) in which the variable probability flag is on, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a high probability state (variable probability state ), it is determined as a “big hit” if it falls within the range of 10000 to 12180, and if not, it is determined as a “loss”. Also, if the probability variation flag is off low probability state, if the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined as "big hit", and if not, it is determined as "off" judge.

Thus, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 193SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "big hit" corresponding to the game state (high probability, low probability) at that time. , in the process of step 193 SGS150a, depending on whether the gaming state when the variable display of the special game or the like is started is a high probability state, using different determination data (determination value) special figure display result is determined to be a ``big hit'', when the game state is a high-probability state, it is determined (determined) as a ``big hit'' with a higher probability than when it is a low-probability state.

When it is judged to be a "jackpot" at step 193SGS150a (step 193SGS150a; Y), the game control flag setting unit turns on the jackpot flag (step 193SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-8(A) is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types (step 193SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer, and "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table A”, “variable probability big win B”, and “variable probability big win C”, according to which one of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches, it is determined which of a plurality of types the jackpot type should be (step 193 SGS 154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 193 SGS154, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is set to either a time-saving state or a probability variable state having a higher advantage for the player than the time-saving state. It is determined before deriving the fixed special symbol as a result of variable display whether to control to . Corresponding to the determined jackpot type, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 193 SGS155), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable big hit" corresponding to non-probable variable big hit, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if it is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable big hit A, it is set to "1". If it is "variable probability B" corresponding to B, it is "2", and if it is "variable probability C" that corresponds to variable probability big hit C, it is "3".

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a "jackpot" at step 193SGS150a (step 193SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b, and the special figure display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 19-7 is selected and set. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "small hit", and the special figure It is determined whether or not the display result is to be a "small hit" (step 193SGS150c). In addition, in step 193SGS150c, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" using the judgment value corresponding to the first special figure. , When the variable special figure is the second special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" using the determination value corresponding to the second special figure.

When it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" in step 193SGS150c (step 193SGS150c; Y), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting section is turned on (step 193SGS151).

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" in step 193SGS150c (step 193SGS150c; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS156.

In step 193SGS156, whether or not to control to the big hit game state (whether the big hit flag is turned on) is a pre-determined result, whether to control to the small hit game state (the small hit flag is turned on) Determined special symbols are set according to the result of prior determination of (whether or not the game is played) and the result of determination of the type of jackpot in the case of the jackpot gaming state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result that the special figure display result is to be "missed", a special symbol indicating a sign of "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Also, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" at step 193SGS150a, if the big hit type at step 193SGS154 is "probability variable big hit A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is displayed. Set as a fixed special pattern. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B", a special symbol indicating the number "5" is set as a fixed special symbol. In addition, when the jackpot type is "unprobable variable jackpot", a special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as a fixed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "small hit", a special symbol showing the symbol "2", which is a small winning symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol. Incidentally, these fixed special symbols are examples, and fixed special symbols other than these may be set, and a plurality of types of symbols may be set as the fixed special symbols.

After setting the fixed special symbol in step 193SGS156, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "1" which is the value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step 193SGS157), the special symbol normal process is terminated. .

It should be noted that when the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure in step 193SGS145 is "0" (step 193SGS145; Y), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step 193SGS158), End the special symbol normal process. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to effect control. It is determined whether or not the transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is. On the other hand, if the command has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is completed.

FIGS. 19-15 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 14 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 19-15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 193SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether the specified jackpot type is "variable probability big hit C" (step 193 SGS163), and if it is not "variable probability big hit C", that is, "variable probability big hit A", "variable probability big hit B", "non- In the case of either "probability variable jackpot" (step 193 SGS163; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A or the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified jackpot type. Specifically, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and the specified jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" or "probability variable jackpot B". , the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, when the identified jackpot type is "variable probability jackpot C" (step 193SGS163; Y), a special hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS165).

In the judgment in step 193SGS161, if the big hit flag is not turned on (step 193SGS161; N), it is further judged whether or not the small hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS166). If the small hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS166; Y), select and set the special hit variation pattern determination table (step 193SGS167), and proceed to step 193SGS175.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 193SGS166; N), by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting unit, the game state is a probability variable state or a time saving state. In step 193SGS168, it is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed. Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 193SGS168; Y), select and set the deviation pattern determination table D as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns ( step 193 (SGS 169).

On the other hand, when it is not during the time saving control, that is, when the time saving flag is not turned on (step 193 SGS168; N), for example provided in the game control counter setting unit, the storage value of the pending memory number counter of the variable special figure By reading, etc., specify the number of pending storage of the fluctuation special figure, and determine whether the specified number of holding storage of the specified fluctuation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170).

If the number of pending memories of the specified fluctuation special figure is 1 or 2 (step 193 SGS170; N), the fluctuation pattern judgment table A for loss is used as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. Select and set (step 193SGS171).

In addition, when the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), it is further determined whether or not the reserved storage number of the specified fluctuation special figure is 3 (step 193SGS172 ).

If the number of pending memories of the specified fluctuation special figure is 3 (step 193 SGS172; Y), the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for loss is selected as a table used for determining one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. (Step 193SGS173).

In addition, if the number of reserved storage of the specified fluctuation special figure is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved storage of the specified fluctuation special figure is 4 (step 193 SGS172; N), the variation pattern is any of a plurality of types Select and set the variation pattern determination table C for loss as a table used for determining .

After executing any one of the processes of step 193SGS164, step 193SGS165, step 193SGS167, step 193SGS169, step 193SGS171, step 193SGS173, and step 193SGS174, for example, the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer or the like Based on the numerical data indicating, by referring to any of the selected (set) variation pattern determination table for the big hit, the variation pattern determination table for the special hit, or the variation pattern determination table for the loss A to D, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 193SGS175).

Incidentally, when the big hit flag is off, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decoration pattern is set to "reach" by determining the variation pattern in the process of step 193SGS175. That is, the process of step 193 SGS170 includes the process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decoration pattern should be the ready-to-win state when the variable display result is "loss".

After determining the variation pattern in step 193SGS175, according to the variation special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 193SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal to update the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

Following the processing of step 193SGS176, settings are made for transmitting various commands to be used at the start of fluctuation of special symbols (step 193SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the first pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (top address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance, the game control buffer setting unit is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in . On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the game state designation command, the second variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, and the variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the second pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the processing of step 193SGS177, the special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 193SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the required time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is stopped and displayed. It's time. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 193SGS179), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 193SGS177, every time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. A designation command, a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command are sequentially transmitted. It will be. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. The commands may be transmitted in the order of the designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory count notification command, or the second reserved memory count notification command.

FIGS. 19-16 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 14 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing of step S112 to end the variation of the special symbols, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B The stop symbol is stopped and displayed (step 193SGS180). In addition, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special figure, the fluctuation of the first special design in the first special design display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is When it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, the control which transmits the design decision command to production control board 12 is done (step 193SGS181). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is turned on (step 193SGS182), and when the big hit flag is turned off (step 193SGS182; N), the small hit flag is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (step 193SGS183).

When the small hit flag is turned on, the effect control board 12 is set to transmit the hit start 5 designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 193 SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small hit display time is set in the small hit display time timer (step 193SGS190b). In addition, the number of opening times (for example, two times) is set in the counter for the number of opening times of the big winning opening (step 193SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step 193SGS190d), which is the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step S118), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag is turned on (step 193 SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time saving flag and turns it off (step 193 SGS 184), hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), hit start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C ), the setting for transmitting the hit start 4 designation command (non-probable variable) is performed (step 193 SGS 185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a game state specifying command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (step 193SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot on the image display device 5, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 193SGS187). In addition, the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probability variable jackpot or a probability variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of a probability variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of a probability variable jackpot C) is set in the big winning opening opening counter. (Step 193SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) (step 193SGS189).

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 193SGS183; N), at step 193SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is "0". When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step 193SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 193 SGS190; N), that is, if the high base state in which the number of time saving times remains, the value of the time saving number counter is decremented by -1 (step 193 SGS 191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after subtraction is "0" (step 193SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 193SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 193SGS193; Y), in order to end the time saving control, after clearing the time saving flag to turn off (step 193SGS194), corresponding to the state of the probability variable flag or time saving flag After setting the transmission of the game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, the low probability/low base) (step 193SGS195), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196.

In step 193SGS196, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

FIGS. 19-17 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 14 as the jackpot ending process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (step 193SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not in operation (Step 193SGS201; N), the value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) for displaying the jackpot end display on the image display device 5. is set (step 193SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 193SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 193SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 193SGS204). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has passed (step 193SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stored jackpot type is non-probability variable jackpot (step 193SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not the non-variable probability jackpot (step 193SGS205; N), it is further determined whether or not the stored jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot C (step 193SGS206).

When the stored jackpot type is variable probability jackpot C (step 193SGS206; Y), after turning on the variable probability flag (step 193SGS210), the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, when the stored jackpot type is not the variable probability jackpot C, that is, when the jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B (step 193SGS206; N), the variable probability flag is turned on (step 193SGS207), After turning on the time saving flag (step 193SGS208) and setting "0" to the time saving frequency counter (step 193SGS209), the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 193SGS205; Y), by executing steps 193SGS211 and 193SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and "100" is set to the time saving counter. After that, go to step 193SGS213.

In step 193SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and transmission setting of a jackpot end designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is performed (step 193SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission setting of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the probability variable flag and the time saving flag that are turned on (step 193 SGS215), the value of the special process flag is changed to a special It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 193SGS216).

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. 19-18 are flow charts showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 14 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 19-18, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 193SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 193SGS221; N), it is determined whether or not the first or second pending storage number notification waiting time set (set) at step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225 described later has elapsed. (Step 193SGS237) If the first or second reserved storage number notification wait time has not elapsed (Step 193SGS2375; N), the command analysis process is terminated. On the other hand, if the first or second reserved memory number notification waiting time has passed, that is, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command or the second When the pending storage number notification command is not received (step 193 SGS237; Y), the display undecided flag of the entry for which the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command is not stored is turned on. At the same time, the effect restriction flag of the entry whose storage has not been completed is turned on (step 193SGS238), and the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command in step 193SGS221 (step 193SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 193 SGS222). Then, when the command is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 193SGS222; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS223). For example, in the process of step 193SGS223, the timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set to the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 193SG192 Just do it.

In step 193SGS222, if the received command is not the first starting opening winning designation command (step 193SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the receiving command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 193SGS224). Then, when it is the second start opening winning designation command (step 193SGS224; Y), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS225). For example, in the process of step 193SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time for receiving the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

In step 193SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 193SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 193SGS226). If the received command is not a design designation command at step 193SGS226 (step 193SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 193SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 193SGS227 (step 193SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 193SGS228). Then, when it is the first reserved storage number notification command (step 193SGS228; Y), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step 193SGS229). .

If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command at step 193SGS228 (step 193SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 193SGS230). Then, when it is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 193SGS230; Y), the waiting time for notification of the second reserved storage number is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step 193SGS231). .

After executing either of the processing of step 193SGS229 and step 193SGS231, the display undecided flag of the stored entry is turned on, and if there is an unreceived command, the production restriction flag is turned on (step 193 SGS232).

If the command received at step 193SGS226 is a pattern designation command (step 193SGS226; Y), or if the command received at step 193SGS227 is a variable category command (step 193SGS227; Y), or step 193SGS223, step 193SGS225, step 193SGS232 After executing any of the processes, the received command is stored at the beginning of the empty area in the start winning received command buffer 193SG194A shown in FIG.

In addition, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the starting winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 193SG194A at the time of starting winning.

If the received command in step 193SGS230 is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 193SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 193SGS234). Then, it is determined whether or not the first or second reserved storage number notification waiting time set in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225 has passed (step 193SGS235), and the first or second reserved storage number notification waiting time has passed. If not (step 193SGS235; N), the process returns to step 193SGS221. On the other hand, if the first or second reserved memory number notification waiting time has passed, that is, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command or the second If the pending storage number notification command is not received (step 193 SGS235; Y), the display undecided flag of the stored entry is turned on, and the effect limit flag of the corresponding entry that has not been stored is turned on. After that (step 193SGS236), the process returns to step 193SGS221.

FIGS. 19-19 are part of a flow chart showing an example of the effect control process processing. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines the presence or absence of the pre-reading notice effect in the pre-reading notice setting process and determines the effect pattern of the pre-reading notice effect (the display pattern of the pending memory display) (S161), Next, a pending display update process for updating the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 193SG005D and the second pending memory display area 193SG005U of the image display device 5 to the display according to the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A. Execute (step 193SGS162).

FIGS. 19-20 are flowcharts showing an example of processing executed in step S161 of FIG. 13 as the pre-reading notice setting processing. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 19-20, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a). Whether or not variable display is being executed may be determined by whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 1-3.

If the variable display is not being executed (step 193SGS240a; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241, and if the variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a; Y), it is during the execution period of the first variable display start frequency notification effect. (Step 193SGS240b). Note that the first variable display start number notification effect is a pseudo-continuous effect, as shown in FIGS. After that, it is an effect for notifying the number of times the variable display of the decoration pattern including the re-variable display is started during one variable display. Further, in step 193 SGS240a, it is possible to determine whether or not the execution period of the first variable display start times notification effect is being executed by referring to the process data of the variable display being executed.

If it is not during the execution period of the first variable display start count notification effect (step 193SGS240b; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241, and if it is during the execution period of the first variable display start count notification effect (step 193SGS240b; Y), step Proceeding to 193SGS 250 sets the pending display flag to "0", which corresponds to the normal display mode, as described below. In other words, during the execution period of the first variable display start frequency notification effect, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed.

At step 193SGS241, the effect control CPU 120 checks the reception command buffer 193SG194A at the time of start winning. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a new stored command at the time of starting winning by determining whether or not there is an entry whose display undecided flag is ON (set to "1") (step 193SGS242). .

If there is no entry whose display undecided flag is ON (step 193SGS242; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry whose display undecided flag is ON (step 193SGS242; Y) , Whether the design designation command of the entry is the 4th design designation or the 6th design designation command, that is, it is determined whether the design designation command is a design designation command indicating a probability variation big hit C or a small hit ( Step 193 SGS 243a). If the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a variable probability big hit C or a small hit (step 193SGS243a; Y), by proceeding to step 193SGS250, as will be described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is changed. , the pending display flag is set. In other words, the pre-reading announcement effect is not executed with respect to the holding memory for the probability variable big win C or the small win.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not a symbol designation command indicating a probability variation big hit C or a small hit, whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first design designation command, that is, the symbol designation command is a command indicating a loss (Step 193SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (either of probability variation jackpot A, probability variation jackpot B, or non-probability variation jackpot) (step 193 SGS243b; N), the entry The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command (step 193SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit, etc. By referring to the effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern in the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect (step 193SGS245).

In step 193SGS245, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (foreign notice type) are determined at the determined ratio as shown in FIG. 19-21(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 19-21(A), the determination ratio of the presence/absence of pre-reading notice effects and the display pattern (notice type) is changed according to the jackpot type specified in the process of step 193SGS244. .

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as the display pattern (preview type) of the pre-reading preview effect. Among these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display. Displayed in area 193SG5U.

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit other than the probability variable jackpot C, there is no case where the pre-reading notice effect is decided not to be executed, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is always decided and the display pattern (notice type) Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β (announcement type) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-21 (A), when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A", the ratio of display pattern β to be determined as the display pattern (notice type) is determined by display pattern α. is set higher than the On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" or "non-probability variable jackpot", the rate at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the rate at which display pattern α is determined. set low.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. is the variable probability big win A, and the player's expectation for the variable probability big win A can be increased.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, when the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than the probability variable jackpot C, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) by always determining the execution of the pre-reading notice effect. Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β displayed in a white star (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in cases other than "jackpot", it may be possible to determine non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the same manner as in the case where the variable display result is "loss".

Also, in step 193SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is ON is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a failure (step 193SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The variation category indicated by the variation category designation command of the entry whose flag is on is specified (step 193 SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category designation command of the entry is C600H, specify that it is a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is specified and C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation pattern including normal reach.

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit, etc., and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 193 SGS247. Whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) in the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect are determined by referring to the hourly pre-reading notice effect determination table (step 193 SGS248).

In step 193 SGS248, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (foreign notice type) are determined at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. 19-21(B). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 19-21 (B), the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview effect and the display pattern (preview type) is set according to the category of the variation pattern specified in the process of step 193SGS247. making it different.

Specifically, two types of display pattern α and display pattern β are provided as the display pattern (notice type). Of these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the reserved memory display is a white square (◇), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area. 193SG5U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the reserved memory display is a white star (☆), which is a specific mode, in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5D. It is displayed in the storage display area 193SG5U. In addition, when the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be non-execution, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a round shape (○) which is a normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 19-21 (B), when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach", the rate at which the pre-reading forewarning effect is executed (the rate determined for other than "no forewarning effect") is set higher. In addition, when the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", it is more likely than the case where the variable display result is "missing" and the category of the variation pattern is "others". The rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed (the rate at which other than "no notice effect" is determined) is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", if the fluctuation category is "other", than if the fluctuation pattern category is "non-reach" Also, the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the percentage of display pattern α determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "others". Furthermore, when the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect is determined when the variable display result is "miss", the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach" when the category of the variation pattern is "others". The percentage of display pattern β determined is set higher than in the case, and when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other" The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the category of the variation pattern is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach" is set to be the highest, and the rate at which the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to be the lowest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19-21(A), when the variable display result is "big hit", the pre-reading notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no notice effect), and the pre-reading effect The rate at which the advance notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined is the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any of the variation pattern categories when the variable display result is "loss". is set higher than the

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "loss (non-reach)", "loss (super reach)", or "loss (other)", the display pattern α is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability variable A)", when the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is the rate at which the display pattern α is determined. is set higher than

With such settings, when the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" than , especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is a "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable big hit A". Since the ratio of , the expectation of the player can be increased.

After execution of step 193SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 193SGS247, that is, determines the display pattern (preview type) to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. (Step 193SGS249).

After step 193SGS245 is executed or if execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined (step 193SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 193 SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the pending storage display with "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the pending memory display with "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS251.

Further, in step 193SGS249, if the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not determined (step 193SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "o" (step 193SGS250), go to step 193SGS251.

After executing step 193SGS246 or step 193SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undecided flag of the entry to "0" (step 193SGS251). Thereafter, the pending display is updated based on the stored contents of the receive command buffer 193SG194A at the time of start winning (step 193SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to one of "0", "1" and "2" set in the pending display flag. be. Further, even when the variable display is executed and the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A are shifted, the image display device 5 is displayed according to the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A after the shift. The pending display in the first pending storage display area 193SG5D and the second pending storage display area 193SG5U provided in the lower position is updated.

Specifically, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As the display mode of this reserved memory display, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○", and the flag value of the reserved display flag is If it is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". In addition, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is two, two pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode corresponding to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D. Also, if the number of the first special figure pending memory is three, three pending memory display is displayed, each pending memory display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D. Also, if the number of first special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D.

In addition, if the second special figure pending memory number is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As the display mode of this reserved memory display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" When the flag value of the pending display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the pending display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. displayed in the form. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending storage is two, for example, two pending storage displays are displayed, and each pending storage display corresponds to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage For example, one reserved memory display is displayed in the display mode of "○", and one reserved memory display is displayed in the display mode of "☆" in the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is three, three pending storage display is displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U. Also, if the number of second special figure pending storage is four, four pending storage displays are displayed, each pending storage display mode according to the flag value set to the pending display flag of the corresponding pending storage is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U.

Then, each time the variable display is executed, the reserved memory display is also shifted in a predetermined shift direction (toward the center of the screen in this characteristic portion 193SG) in accordance with the decrease (consumption) of the reserved memory.

In other words, if the pending memory of the start winning command buffer 193SG194A is shifted by consuming the pending memory in the variable display start setting process to be described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, the variable display starting time after the shift is shifted. Based on the pending memory of the received command buffer 193SG194A, the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 193SG5D and the second pending memory display area 193SG5U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new pending memory due to the start winning. , the display pattern of the reserved memory is determined and set to the reserved display flag, and the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 193SG5D are displayed in a display mode according to the flag value set to the reserved display flag. It comes to be displayed in the storage display area 193SG5U.

In addition, in this characterizing portion 193SG, the form of executing the processing of step 193SGS252 in the pre-reading notice setting processing is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved storage display area 193SG5D And the process for updating the pending display of the second pending storage display area 193SG5U may be executed separately as a process (for example, pending display update process) different from the pre-reading notice setting process.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in step 193SGS242, execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the holding storage at the starting winning is determined. New storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 193SGS242 due to the simultaneous occurrence of the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening If it is determined that there is, that is, if the entry whose display undecided flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage, both entries are pre-read notice It is a target for determining whether to execute the performance or not. Both the pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the first special plan is newly stored and the pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special plan are newly stored are stored depending on whether the pre-reading notice effect is executed or not. In the case of a determination target, if there is no entry of the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the pending display of the pending storage of the first special symbol and the pending display of the second special symbol There is a case where the pre-reading forewarning effects are simultaneously executed in both displays.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 193SG, as described above, when the starting winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is Both the newly stored pending memory and the newly stored pending memory command at the time of starting winning in the second special figure are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect, but the present invention is this In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan Only one of them may be determined to execute.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved storage in the first special symbol is suspended in the second special symbol. Priority is given to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading foretelling effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan is unambiguously determined to be non-execution, and the first special plan When it is decided not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the game state is a time-saving state in which high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution and non-execution of pre-reading notice effect in pending storage in the second special figure is determined with priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice performance in the reserved storage in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special plan, it is unambiguously decided not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special plan, and the second special plan When it is determined not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect in the reserved memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

19-22 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 193SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 193SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 193SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off at step 193SGS271 (step 193SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 193SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273; Y ), various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer 193SG194A, one buffer number It is shifted upward by minutes (step 193SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 193SGS272 or step 193SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 193SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) and the variation pattern (step 193SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the small hit. decide from within. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, select a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C. decide from within. Further, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the non-reach variation pattern, the three symbols are irregular as the stop symbols. A combination of symbols other than the above-described chance symbols (lost symbols) is determined. Further, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss and the variation pattern of the variable display is the reach variation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but the middle A combination of reach-losses with different symbols (losing symbols) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing a pseudo continuous effect during variable display (step 193SGS277). If the variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing a pseudo-continuous effect during variable display (step 193 SGS277; Y), advance notice effect determination processing for variable display to execute a pseudo-continuous effect (for non-execution of pseudo-continuous effect) is executed to determine whether or not to execute the advance notice effect during the variable display and the advance notice effect to be executed (step 193SGS278).

After executing step 193SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern. If the variation pattern is the super ready-to-win variation pattern (193SGS279; Y), it is determined whether or not to execute a special temporary stop notification effect instead of the temporary stop notification effect based on the variable display result (step 193SGS280). . The temporary stop notification effect is an effect for notifying the player of the temporary stop of the decorative symbols by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. , The special temporary stop notification effect is to temporarily stop the background image displayed on the image display device 5 in addition to outputting a temporary stop notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect. The decoration pattern is temporarily stopped by updating the background image according to the number of times (first special background image if the number of times of temporary stop is 1, second special background image if it is 2, and third special background image if it is 3). is an effect for informing the player of

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined (step 193SGS281). If it is decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (step 193SGS281; Y), a process table corresponding to the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect and the variation pattern is selected, and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS282).

When the variation pattern is the normal reach variation pattern (193SGS279; N) or when it is determined not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (193SGS281; N), the temporary stop notification effect period is set to 2 seconds based on the variable display result. 1.5 seconds (step 193SGS283). Then, a process table is selected according to the temporary stop notification effect period and variation pattern determined in step 193SGS283, and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS284).

Further, if the variation pattern is a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo-continuous effect during variable display (step 193 SGS277; N), an advance notice effect determination process for variable display that does not execute a pseudo-continuous effect is executed and variable display is being performed. It determines whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the advance notice effect to be executed (step 193SGS285). After determining whether or not to execute the notice effect and the notice effect to be executed in step 193SGS285, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (193SGS286).

At step 193SGS287, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected at any one of 193SGS282, 193SGS284, and 193SGS286 (step 193SGS287).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 193SGS288). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, the production control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 193SGS289). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 193SGS290). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (fluctuation) of the decoration pattern. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 193SGS291).

The effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by 1 each time the effect process during variable display is executed, and determines whether or not the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has not timed out, the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer has timed out, the next process data is switched to and the next process is started again. By starting a timer and controlling the performance device according to the next process data, variable display of the decoration pattern is executed. Note that the effect control CPU 120 can execute a notice effect execution process for executing a notice effect in the effect process during variable display when execution of the notice effect is determined in the variable display start setting process. .

Next, the flow of variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 19-23 (A), when the variation pattern is a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during variable display, first, after becoming a reach, the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped. A suggesting temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. It should be noted that the temporary stop suggestion effect in this characterizing portion 193SG is such that after the decoration symbols are temporarily stopped in the "left" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the pseudo continuous symbols are displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C. is a production that performs variable display at a slower speed than usual. The length of the temporary stop suggestion effect period differs according to the length of the temporary stop notification effect period determined in step 193SG283 of the variable display start setting process.

When the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion effect ends at the first temporary stop timing A, and the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed. A stop is executed and a temporary stop notification effect is executed for two seconds. Further, when the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion effect ends at the first temporary stop timing B, and the pseudo A temporary stop of consecutive symbols is executed, and a temporary stop notification effect is executed for 1.5 seconds. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 19-23(A), the temporary stop notification effect period A and the temporary stop notification effect period B have the same timing, that is, the temporary stop notification effect has effect periods of 1.5 seconds and 2 seconds. It is always set to end at a specific timing regardless of whether it is determined in seconds.

Then, when the temporary stop notification effect ends, the re-variable display notification effect is executed. In the re-variable display notification effect, in addition to outputting re-variable display notification sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, a character image corresponding to the number of re-variable displays is displayed on the image display device 5 (if the number of re-variable displays is the first time, character A , the image of character B for the second time, and the image of character C for the third time) to inform the player that the re-variable display of the decoration pattern will be executed.

Note that the first re-variable display is executed during the re-variable display notification effect. When the re-variable display notification effect ends, the first variable display start frequency notification effect is executed from the end timing of the re-variable display notification effect. In the first variable display start number notification effect, the number of variable display times of the decoration pattern including the number of re-variable display times is displayed on the image display device 5, and effect images of colors corresponding to the number of variable display times are displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. It is a production that displays In other words, the first variable display start number notification effect corresponding to the first re-variable display is to display "x2" on the image display device 5 and to display blue effect images on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. In the first variable display start number notification effect corresponding to the second re-variable display, "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5, and green effect images are displayed on the left and right ends of the image display device 5. , and the first variable display start number notification effect corresponding to the third re-variable display is to display "x4" on the image display device 5, and red This is a production that displays an effect image.

Then, when the first variable display start frequency notification effect ends, the second variable display start frequency notification effect is executed from the end timing of the first variable display start frequency notification effect. The second variable display start frequency notification effect is an effect for displaying the variable display frequency of the decoration pattern including the re-variable display frequency on the image display device 5 in a smaller size than the first variable display start frequency notification effect.

After the second variable display start count informing effect is completed, the ready-to-win state is reached again, and the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed. At this time, the ready-to-win performance of the normal ready-to-win is executed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbols.

As shown in FIG. 19-23(B), when it is determined that the special temporary stop notification effect is not to be executed and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-win variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during variable display, As in the case where the variation pattern shown in FIG. 19-23 (A) is the normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, after reaching the reach, the temporary stop suggestion effect and the first pseudo continuous effect Temporary stop and re-variable display of symbols, temporary stop notification effect, re-variable display notification effect, first variable display start frequency notification effect, second variable display start frequency notification effect, first temporary stop and re-variable display are executed. After that, it becomes reach again, and the temporary stop and re-variable display of the second pseudo-continuous pattern, temporary stop notification effect, re-variable display notification effect, first variable display start number notification effect, and second variable display start frequency notification effect are executed. be done. Then, after the second variable display start frequency notification effect is completed for the second time, the ready-to-win state is reached again, and the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed. At this time, the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is executed without temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbols.

If the first temporary stop notification effect is executed during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the second temporary stop notification effect is also executed during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds). , If the first temporary stop notification effect is executed during the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the second temporary stop notification effect is also executed during the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds). is executed.

Further, as described above, in the second re-variable display notification effect, the image of the character (character B) different from that in the first re-variable display effect is displayed on the image display device 5 . In addition, in the second variable display start frequency notification effect and the second variable display start frequency notification effect, the first variable display start frequency notification effect and the second variable display start frequency notification effect are performed on the image display device 5 . In contrast, "x3" (in the second variable display start count notification effect, "x3" of a smaller size than the second variable display start count notification effect) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 19-25, when it is determined that the special temporary stop notification effect is not to be executed and the variation pattern is a super ready-to-reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during variable display, FIG. 23(B) is the super ready-to-win variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, a temporary stop suggesting effect after reaching the ready-to-win, and the pseudo-continuous pattern up to the second time, respectively. Temporary stop and re-variable display, temporary stop notification effect, re-variable display notification effect, first variable display start frequency notification effect, and second variable display start frequency notification effect are executed. Then, after the second variable display start number of times notification effect is completed, the ready-to-win state is reached again. A first variable display start frequency notification effect and a second variable display start frequency notification effect are executed, and a super ready-to-win reach effect is also executed.

If the first and second temporary stop notification effects are executed during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds), the third temporary stop notification effect is also executed during the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds). If the first and second temporary stop notification effects are executed during the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds), the third temporary stop notification effect is also executed during the temporary stop notification effect period B ( 1.5 seconds).

Further, as described above, in the third re-variable display notification effect, the image of the character (character C) different from the first and second re-variable display effects is displayed on the image display device 5 . In addition, in the third variable display start count notification effect and the second variable display start count notification effect, the image display device 5 performs the second variable display start count notification effect and the second variable display start count notification effect. In contrast, "x4" (in the third second variable display start count notification effect, "x4" of a smaller size than in the third first variable display start count notification effect) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 19-26, when the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined and the variation pattern is the super ready-to-win variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, first, the temporary stop is performed. Suggestion production is executed.

In the variable display, when the first temporary stop timing A is reached, the temporary stop notification effect is completed, the temporary stop of the decoration pattern is executed, and the special temporary stop notification effect is executed for 2 seconds. . That is, in the variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, unlike the variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the temporary stop suggestion effect period and the special temporary stop notification The performance period remains unchanged.

After the end of the special temporary stop notification performance, the first re-variable display of the decoration pattern is executed without executing the re-variable display notification performance and the first variable display start frequency notification performance. In addition, after a while, the second variable display start count notification effect is executed. That is, in the variable display, after the first special temporary stop notification effect is executed, the image of the character (character A) is displayed as the first re-variable display notification effect, or the first variable display start frequency notification effect is displayed. The display of "x2" on the image display device 5 is not executed, and the image display device 5 as the second variable display start count notification effect displays "x2" in a size smaller than the first variable display start count notification effect. " is displayed only.

After the temporary stop and re-variable display of the first decoration pattern, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, the second temporary stop and re-variable display of the decoration pattern, special After the provisional stop notification effect and the second variable display start frequency notification effect are executed, the super ready-to-win reach effect is further executed.

As for the second variable display start count notification effect for the second time, the image display device 5 displays "x3" in a size smaller than the first variable display start count notification effect, as in FIG. 19-23(B). is executed.

As shown in FIG. 19-27, when the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined and the variation pattern is the super ready-to-win variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, FIG. 19-26 Similarly, after the temporary stop suggestion effect, the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative pattern up to the second time, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start number notification effect are executed, the third decorative pattern provisional A stop and re-variable display, a special temporary stop notification effect, and a second variable display start times notification effect are executed, and a super ready-to-win reach effect is executed.

As for the third variable display start count notification effect, the image display device 5 displays "x4" in a size smaller than the first variable display start count notification effect, as in FIG. 19-23(B). is executed.

19-28, the temporary stop notification effect in the feature part 193SG is a pseudo-continuous effect in which the temporary stop notification sound is output from the timing when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped. , 8R to inform the player that the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped, and is executed for 2 seconds or 1.5 seconds.

In the special temporary stop notification effect, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped as a pseudo continuous effect, and in addition, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped. (1st special background image if the number of times of temporary stop is 1st, 2nd special background image if it is 2nd, 3rd special background image if it is 3rd) according to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern This is an effect to notify the player. Note that the special background image displayed on the image display device 5 as the special temporary stop notification effect is an image that is displayed until the next special background image is updated or until the variable display is completed. The sound output period (special temporary stop notification effect period) is 2 seconds, which is the same as part of the temporary stop notification effect.

The re-variable display notification effect is outputting a re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R and displaying a character image corresponding to the number of re-variable displays on the image display device 5 (if the re-variable display count is the first time, the character A image, character B image for the second time, and character C image for the third time) to inform the player that the decorative symbols are re-variably displayed. Note that the duration of the re-variable display notification effect (the character image display period on the image display device 5 and the re-variable display notification sound output period from the speakers 8L and 8R) is 3 regardless of the number of times the re-variable display is performed. seconds. In addition, as described above, in the variable display that executes the pseudo-continuous effect, the larger the number of times of execution of the pseudo-continuous effect (the number of times of temporary stop and re-variable display), the higher the expectation of the big hit is set. As for the display/notification effect, the degree of expectation for the big win is set to be the highest when the image of the character C is finally displayed, and the degree of expectation for the big win is set to be the lowest when the image of the character A is finally displayed.

The first variable display start count notification effect is for notifying the number of times the variable display of decorative symbols including the re-variable display is started during one variable display after the re-variable display is started as a pseudo-continuous effect. The number of times the variable display of decorative patterns including these re-variable displays has been started on the image display device 5 ("x2" in the first variable display start number notification effect, and the second first variable display The effect is to display "x3" in the number-of-starts notification effect, and to display "x4" in the third-time variable-display start-numbers notification effect. It should be noted that the effect period of the first variable display start frequency notification effect is one second regardless of the number of variable display times of the decorative symbols including the re-variable display.

The second variable display start number notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of times the variable display of the decoration pattern including the re-variable display is started during the variable display of 1 after the first variable display start number notification effect. , the number of times the variable display of decorative patterns including these re-variable displays has been started in the image display device 5 ("x2" in the first variable display start number notification effect, the second first variable display start number notification effect This is an effect in which "x3" is displayed in the effect, and "x4" is displayed in the third time also in the first variable display start frequency notification effect in a size smaller than that of the first variable display start frequency notification effect. It should be noted that the effect period of the second variable display start frequency notification effect is two seconds regardless of the number of variable display times of the decorative symbols including the re-variable display.

FIG. 19-29(A) is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect determination process (for execution of the pseudo-continuous effect) of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 19-22. In the announcement effect determination process (for execution of the pseudo-continuous effect), the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 193SGS301). Then, a random value for determining the execution of the announcement effect is extracted, and the random value and a table for determining the announcement effect (not shown) are used to determine whether or not the announcement effect is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and the announcement to be executed. An effect is determined (step 193SGS302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-29(B), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 20%. , the execution of the group notice effect is decided at a ratio of 45%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is decided at a ratio of 30%.

Note that the cut-in notice effect is a effect in which a cut-in image is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 19-29(F), and the group notice effect is shown in FIG. This is an effect in which a large number of characters are displayed across the display area of the image display device 5 as shown.

If the variable display result is out and the super reach variation pattern (super reach out) is determined, non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 40%, execution of the cut-in notice effect is decided at a rate of 30%, and the group The execution of the notice performance is determined at a rate of 25%, and the execution of the cut-in notice performance and the group notice performance is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variable display result is out and the normal reach variation pattern (normal reach out) is determined, the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 90%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%. The execution of the notice performance is determined at a rate of 2%, and the execution of the cut-in notice performance and the group notice performance is determined at a rate of 0%.

In other words, in the variable display that executes the pseudo-continuous effect in the characteristic portion 193SG, the expectation for the big hit is set to the lowest when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and the cut-in notice effect is set as the notice effect. When only is executed, the expectation of a big hit is set higher than when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and when only the group notice effect is executed as the notice effect, the cut-in notice effect The expectation of a big hit is set higher than when only is executed, and the expectation of a big hit is set highest when both the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed as the notice effect (pseudo continuous Expectations for big hits related to advance notice effects in variable display that executes effects: cut-in advance notice effects + group advance notice effects>group advance notice effects>cut-in effects>non-execution).

After executing step 193SGS302, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the notice effect has been determined (execution of at least one of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect has been determined) (step 193SGS303). If execution of any of the advance notice effects has not been determined (step 193SGS303; N), the advance notice effect determination processing (for execution of pseudo continuous effects) is terminated, and execution of any of the advance notice effects is determined (step 193SGS303; Y) stores the determined announcement effect, sets the announcement effect start waiting timer, and ends the announcement effect determination process (for execution of pseudo continuous effect) (step 193SGS304, step 193SGS305).

As shown in FIGS. 19-32, the period during which these advance notice effects can be executed overlaps the re-variable display notification effect period and the first variable display start frequency notification effect period. In particular, when it is decided to execute both the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect as the notice effect, these cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are executed during the re-variable display notification effect period and the first variable display start times notification effect period. The production is performed in duplicate.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, when execution of any of the notice effects is determined in the notice effect determination processing (for execution of the pseudo-continuous effect), the same notice effect is executed in all the re-variable display notification effect periods. (See Figures 19-29 to 19-31).

FIG. 19-30(A) is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo-continuous effect) of the variable display start setting process in FIG. 19-22. In the announcement effect determination process (for non-execution of the pseudo-continuous effect), the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 193SGS311). Then, a random value for determining the execution of the announcement effect is extracted, and the random value and a table for determining the announcement effect (not shown) are used to determine whether or not the announcement effect is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, and the announcement to be executed. The effect is determined (step 193SGS312).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-30(B), when the result of the variable display is a big hit, the non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is decided at a rate of 30%. , and execution of the group announcement effect is determined at a rate of 65%.

If the variable display result is lost and the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach failure) is determined, non-execution of the notice effect is decided at a rate of 40%, execution of the cut-in notice effect is decided at a rate of 35%, and the group Execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 25%. In addition, if the variable display result is out and the normal reach variation pattern (normal reach out) is determined, the non-execution of the notice effect is determined at a rate of 90%, and the execution of the cut-in notice effect is determined at a rate of 8%. Execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 2%.

In other words, in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed in the characteristic portion 193SG, the expectation for the big hit is set to the lowest when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and the cut-in notice effect is set as the notice effect. When only is executed, the expectation of a big hit is set higher than when neither the cut-in notice effect nor the group notice effect is executed, and when only the group notice effect is executed as the notice effect, the cut-in notice effect The expectation of big hit is set higher than when only is executed (expectation of big hit regarding advance notice effect in variable display for executing pseudo-continuous effect: group notice effect>cut-in effect>non-execution).

After executing step 193SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the advance notice effect is determined (step 193SGS313). If the execution of the notice effect has not been decided (step 193SGS313; N), the notice effect decision processing (for non-execution of the pseudo-continuous effect) is terminated, and if the execution of the notice effect has been decided (step 193SGS313; Y), The decided notice effect is stored, and the notice effect start waiting timer is set to end the notice effect determination process (for non-execution of pseudo continuous effect) (step 193SGS314, step 193SGS315).

In addition, when the notice effect is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, the notice effect may be executed during any period from the start timing of the variable display to the ready-to-reach timing.

FIG. 19-31(A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio when the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at step 193SG280 in FIG. 19-22. At step 193SG280 in FIG. 19-22, if the variable display result is a big hit (super reach jackpot), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the special temporary stop notification effect (execute the temporary stop notification effect) at a rate of 20%. Execution of the special temporary stop notification effect (non-execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is lost (super reach lost), non-execution of the special temporary stop notification effect (execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution of the special temporary stop notification effect ( non-execution of temporary stop notification effect) is determined at a rate of 20%.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, when the special temporary stop notification effect is executed in the variable display for executing the pseudo continuous effect (temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the temporary stop of the decorative symbol and the image When the special background image is displayed on the display device 5), when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (when the temporary stop notification sound is only output from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern; When the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the expectation of the big hit is set higher than .

Further, as described above, focusing on the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display, the image is displayed in response to the first temporary stop of the decoration symbol. Although only the first special background image is displayed on the display device 5, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display, the image display device 5 is displayed in response to the temporary stop of the decoration symbol for the first time. After the first special background image is displayed on the second special background image, the second special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the first special background image (the first special background image ), and the third special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the second special background image (from the second special background image) in response to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern. (updated to the third special background image).

In other words, with respect to the variable display for executing the pseudo-continuous effect, the greater the number of pseudo-continuous effects executed during the variable display, the higher the expectation for the big hit is set. is the third special background image, the expectation for the big win is set to be the highest, and the expectation for the big win is the lowest for the background image finally displayed on the image display device 5 being the first special background image. The set (big hit expectation regarding the special background image finally displayed on the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect: 3rd special background image > 2nd special background image > 1st special background image ).

FIG. 19-31(B) is a diagram showing a determination ratio when the effect control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification effect period based on the variable display result in step 193SG283 in FIG. 19-22. At step 193SG283 in FIG. 19-22, if the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 determines the temporary stop notification effect period to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 60% and 40%. is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds). On the other hand, if the variable display result is incorrect, the temporary stop notification effect period is determined to be the temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 40%, and the temporary stop notification effect period B (1 second) is determined at a rate of 60%. .5 seconds). That is, in the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, if the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect is set to 2 seconds, the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect is 1. The big hit expectation is set higher than when it is set to 5 seconds (the big hit expectation regarding the effect period of the temporary stop notification effect when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display that executes the pseudo continuous effect : Temporary stop notification effect period A (2 seconds) > Temporary stop notification effect period B (1.5 seconds)).

In addition, in this characteristic portion 193SG, the form in which the temporary stop notification effect period can be determined from 2 seconds and 1.5 seconds has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the temporary stop notification effect period is It may be determined uniquely in one period, or may be determined from three or more periods.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, the longer the temporary stop notification effect period is, the higher the expectation of the big hit is than the short temporary stop notification effect period, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a short temporary stop notification effect period may have a higher expectation for a big hit than a long temporary stop notification effect period.

Next, the output mode of sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R during variable display will be described. As shown in FIGS. 19-32, first, the speakers 8L and 8R are capable of outputting BGM (music) based on the progress of the variable display. The BGM is output during the variable display except for the re-variable display notification effect period. The speakers 8L and 8R are capable of outputting a temporary stop suggesting sound, a temporary stop notification sound, a re-variable display notification sound, and a first variable display start frequency notification sound. Of these, the temporary stop suggesting sound is output only during the temporary stop suggesting production period, the temporary stop information sound is output only during the temporary stop information production period, the re-variable display information sound is output only during the re-variable display information production period, The 1 variable display start count notification sound is output only during the first variable display start count notification effect period.

Further, the speakers 8L and 8R are capable of outputting a cut-in notice effect sound and a group notice effect sound. Of these, the cut-in notice effect sound is output only during the cut-in notice effect execution period when execution of the cut-in notice effect has been decided, and the group notice effect sound is output only when execution of the group notice effect has been decided. If there is, it is output only during the execution period of the group announcement effect.

That is, as shown in FIG. 19-32, during the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, the re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R is not limited during the variable display except for the re-variable display notification effect period. Furthermore, two kinds of sounds, BGM and temporary stop suggesting sound, are output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the temporary stop suggesting effect period, while the speakers 8L and 8R output the first variable display start frequency notification effect period. In addition to the first variable display start frequency notification sound, a maximum of four types of sounds including BGM, cut-in notice effect sound, and group notice effect sound are output.

Next, the display mode of each image on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect period will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 19-33, during the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 draws the image data 2 from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5. Moving display of pseudo consecutive symbols is executed. The moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols is executed at the speed V1 during the period from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect period to the display image data switching timing. From the display image data switching timing, the pseudo-continuous pattern is not drawn as the image data 2. In other words, from the display image data switching timing, the pseudo-continuous pattern as the image data 2 is not displayed.

In addition, a temporary stop suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with the image data 1 from the middle of the moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols at the speed V1. The temporary stop suggesting image is displayed from the middle of the moving display of the pseudo continuous symbols at the speed V1 to the period of the display image data switching timing, and is not displayed (is hidden) during the other period.

Further, immediately before the display image data switching timing, the display of the pseudo-continuous pattern in the central portion of the image display device 5 is started by drawing with the image data 3 . The pseudo-continuous pattern drawn by the image data 3 does not move (at a speed of 0) until the display image data switching timing. The display is moved at a speed V3, which is higher than . The moving display of the pseudo-continuous pattern at the speed V3 by drawing the image data 3 is not displayed when the pseudo-continuous pattern moves out of the display area of the image display device 5 .

Further, from the display image data switching timing, by drawing with the image data 2, the moving display (variable display) of the decoration pattern from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 is executed. The moving display (variable display) of the decoration pattern is executed at a speed V2 (speed: V3>V2>V1) which is higher than the speed V1 and lower than the speed V3 from the display image data switching timing. The moving display (variable display) of the decoration pattern continues until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect.

Then, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays the concentration line by drawing with the image data 4 . The concentration lines are displayed at a density (display density) of D1 for a certain period of time from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, and then displayed at D2, which is higher than D1. That is, the number of concentration lines displayed increases as a certain period of time elapses from the start of display on the image display device 5 . Then, the concentration lines are displayed at the density D1 again from the display image data switching timing, and then are not displayed.

Therefore, in the temporary stop suggesting effect period in which the pseudo continuous symbols are not stopped, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggesting effect to the display image data switching timing, the concentration lines are displayed at the density D1, thereby displaying the right and left decorations. The visibility of the patterns (decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) is lower than the state (visibility: high) before execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. (Visibility: Medium). Furthermore, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) becomes lower due to the change in the concentration line density from D1 to D2. (Visibility: Low).

Further, from the timing of switching the display image data to the timing of ending the display of the concentrated lines, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is higher than when the concentrated lines are displayed with the density D2 because the concentrated lines are displayed with the density D1. Higher (visibility: medium). After the display end timing of the concentrated line, the display of the concentrated line is finished (not displayed), so that the left and right decoration patterns have the highest visibility (visibility: high).

As shown in FIG. 19-34, in the temporary stop suggestion effect period when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 draws with the image data 2, from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 The moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols is executed. The moving display of the pseudo continuous symbols is executed at a speed V1 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggesting effect period to the end timing of the temporary stop suggesting effect (temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous symbols). The period required from the variable display start timing to the temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous symbols is the period required from the variable display start timing to the display image data switching timing when the pseudo continuous symbols shown in FIGS. 19-33 are not temporarily stopped. are identical. Further, after the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the temporary stop notification effect is executed, but during the temporary stop notification effect execution period, the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped (speed V0) in the "medium" decoration symbol display area 5C. hidden after

Further, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the image display device 5 executes the display of the concentration line by drawing with the image data 4 . As for the display of the concentration lines, the concentration line density (display density) is displayed at D2 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect (temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous pattern). , is hidden from the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

Then, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays the concentration line by drawing with the image data 4 . The concentration lines are displayed at a density (display density) of D1 for a certain period of time from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, and then displayed at D2, which is higher than D1. That is, the number of concentration lines displayed increases as a certain period of time elapses from the start of display on the image display device 5 . Then, the concentration line is not displayed from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous pattern.

Therefore, in the temporary stop suggesting effect period in which the pseudo continuous symbols are not stopped, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggesting effect to the display image data switching timing, the concentration lines are displayed at the density D1, thereby displaying the right and left decorations. The visibility of the patterns (decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) is lower than the state (visibility: high) before execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. (Visibility: Medium). Furthermore, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) becomes lower due to the change in the concentration line density from D1 to D2. (Visibility: Low). Further, from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-continuous pattern, display of the concentration line is finished (not displayed), so that the visibility of the left and right decoration patterns is highest (visibility: high).

Although not shown in FIGS. 19 to 34, after the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, that is, during the temporary stop notification effect period, the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbols are drawn by drawing the image data 1. is displayed around the pseudo-continuous pattern. The effect image for notifying the temporary stop of the decoration pattern is then switched to display in the entire display area of the image display device 5 (see FIGS. 19-35). It should be noted that the effect image for temporary stop notification in this characteristic portion 193SG is an image whose transmittance is set to 0%.

That is, during the temporary stop notification effect period, the visibility of the left and right decoration patterns is higher than during the temporary stop suggestion effect execution period (visibility: medium) due to the concentration line being temporarily hidden, but the image display device Due to the display of the temporary stop notification effect image in the entire display area 5, the left and right decoration patterns become invisible (visibility: invisible).

However, from the timing when the temporary stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbols in the image data 2 ends, the speed V2 of the pseudo-continuous symbols toward the player side (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) by drawing the image data 2 as well. movement display is executed. At this time, since the moving display (enlarged display) of the pseudo-continuous symbols is executed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, the left and right pseudo-continuous symbols become invisible again.

In the case where the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped in the temporary stop suggestion effect, the moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 3 and the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 2 are performed. Movement display of the decoration pattern (variable display) is not executed.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 193SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-35 to 19-47.

First, when it is decided not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in FIGS. After a lapse of time, the decoration symbols stop (swinging stop) in the "left" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L and 5C, and become ready-to-win. After that, as the first temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols move downward from above in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C at a speed V1. At this time, on the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the central portion of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decoration pattern display area 5C). The concentration lines are displayed with a density of D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 after a certain period of time.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display based on the variation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach-lost which does not execute the pseudo-continuous effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. It moves downward on the image display device at a speed of V2 and disappears. At this time, the concentration line density displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variation pattern (either one of PA2-2 to PA2-4 and PB1-2 to PB1-4) that executes a pseudo continuous effect, as shown in FIG. 19-35 (E) At the same time, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, and an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols. Also, the saturated line is not displayed. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits blue light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 19-35(F) and 19-35(G), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to be displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that left and right decorative patterns are displayed. It becomes invisible to the player, and blue light emission by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 19-35 (G) and 19-35 (H), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position, a plurality of A crack is displayed. After that, an image is displayed in which the pseudo-continuous pattern with the plurality of cracks explodes, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is formed as shown in FIGS. 19-36 (I) and 19-36 (J) An image is displayed in which the characters (each alphabet of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the case of this characteristic portion 193SG) are diffused and moved toward the player side.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 19-37(K) to 19-37(P), the first re-variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Further, as a re-variable display notification effect, the image of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5, and re-variable display notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, if execution of the cut-in notice effect or the group notice effect is determined at the start of the variable display, these cut-in notice effects and the cut-in notice effect are overlapped with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start times notification effect. A group announcement effect is executed.

Then, when the re-variable display notification effect is completed, as the first variable display start frequency notification effect for the first time, an image of "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5, and both the left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. , the blue effect image starts to be displayed. Also, at this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves again from the retracted position to the first effect position and emits blue light.

It should be noted that the image of "x2" displayed on the image display device 5 as the first variable display start count notification effect for the first time is displayed once on the image display device 5, and then displayed in a larger size to be non-displayed. display (see FIGS. 19-37(O) and 19-37(P)).

When the first variable display start count notification effect ends, the blue light emission of the second movable body 193SG033 ends, and the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position. Also, as the first second variable display start count notification effect, an image of “×2” smaller in size than the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5 .

After a while after the first second variable display start count notification effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. In 5L and 5R, after the decorative symbols stop (swing stop) and become ready-to-win, as the second temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed downward in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. It moves at speed V1. At this time, on the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the central portion of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decoration pattern display area 5C). The concentration lines are displayed with a density of D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 after a certain period of time.

Then, when the variable display is the variation pattern PA2-2 of the normal reach loss in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed only once or the variation pattern PB1-2 of the normal reach jackpot, as shown in FIG. 19-38 (U), The pseudo-continuous symbols are moved downward on the image display device at a speed V2 without being temporarily stopped, and are not displayed. At this time, the concentration line density displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variation pattern (any one of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, and PB1-4) in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed two or more times, FIG. 19-38 (V) , the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, and an effect image for notifying temporary stop is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols. Also, the saturated line is not displayed. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits green light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 19-38(W) and 19-38(X), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to be displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that left and right decorative patterns are displayed. The green light emission by the second movable body 193SG033 ends as it becomes invisible to the player. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19-38 (X) and 19-38 (Y), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position, a plurality of A crack is displayed. After that, an image is displayed in which the pseudo-continuous pattern in which these cracks are displayed explodes, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is formed as shown in FIGS. 19-39 (Z) and 19-39 (a). An image is displayed in which the characters (each alphabet of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the case of this characteristic portion 193SG) are diffused and moved toward the player side.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 19-40(b) to 19-40(h), the second re-variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Furthermore, as a re-variable display notification effect, the image of the character B is displayed on the image display device 5, and re-variable display notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is determined at the start of the variable display, these cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are overlapped with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start times notification effect. A preview effect is executed.

Then, when the re-variable display notification effect is completed, as the second first variable display start frequency notification effect, the image display device 5 displays an image of "x 3", and the left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. , the green effect image starts to be displayed. Also, at this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves again from the retracted position to the first effect position and emits green light.

It should be noted that the image of "x 3" displayed on the image display device 5 as the second first variable display start frequency notification effect is once displayed on the image display device 5, and then displayed in a larger size to be non-displayed. display (see FIGS. 19-40(f) and 19-40(g)).

When the first variable display start count notification effect is completed, a second variable display start count notification effect is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5, and a size of “×3” smaller than that of the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed. image is displayed.

Shortly after the second variable display start count notification effect is completed, the “left” and “right” decorative pattern display areas are displayed as shown in FIGS. In 5L and 5R, after the decorative symbols stop (swing stop) and become ready-to-win, as the third temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed downward in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. It moves at speed V1. At this time, on the image display device 5, a concentrated line is displayed from the peripheral portion of the image display device 5 toward the central portion of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decoration pattern display area 5C). The concentration lines are displayed with a density of D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 after a certain period of time.

Then, when the variable display is the variation pattern PA2-3 of the super reach losing and the variation pattern PB1-3 of the super reach jackpot in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed only twice, as shown in FIG. 19-41 (h). Then, the pseudo-continuous pattern is moved to the lower part of the image display device at the speed V2 without being temporarily stopped and is not displayed. At this time, the concentration line density displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variation pattern (any one of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, and PB1-4) in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed two or more times, FIG. 19-41(i) , the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, and an effect image for notifying temporary stop is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols. Also, the saturated line is not displayed. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect. Further, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits red light.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 19-41(j) and 19-41(k), the effect image for temporary stop notification is switched to be displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that left and right decorative patterns are displayed. The state becomes invisible to the player, and the second movable body 193SG033 stops emitting red light. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19-41(k) and 19-41(l), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first effect position to the retracted position, a plurality of A crack is displayed. After that, an image is displayed in which the pseudo-continuous pattern in which these cracks are displayed explodes, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is configured as shown in FIGS. 19-42 (m) and 19-42 (n) An image is displayed in which the characters (each alphabet of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the case of this characteristic portion 193SG) are diffused and moved toward the player side.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 19-43(o) to 19-43(u), the third re-variable display of the decoration pattern is started. Further, as a re-variable display notification effect, the image of the character C is displayed on the image display device 5, and re-variable display notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, when execution of the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect is determined at the start of the variable display, these cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect are overlapped with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start times notification effect. A preview effect is executed.

Then, when the re-variable display notification effect is completed, as the third first variable display start frequency notification effect, an image of "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5, and both the left and right ends of the image display device 5 are displayed. , the display of the red effect image is started. Also, at this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves again from the retracted position to the first effect position and emits red light.

It should be noted that the "x4" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the third first variable display start count notification effect is displayed once on the image display device 5, and then displayed in a larger size. (See FIGS. 19-43(s) and 19-43(t)).

When the first variable display start count notification effect is completed, a third variable display start count notification effect is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5, and a size of “×4” smaller than that of the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed. image is displayed.

Here, the execution time of the temporary stop suggestion effect will be described. As shown in FIGS. 19-44(A) and 19-44(B), when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the pseudo consecutive symbols are directed downward from above at the speed V1 on the image display device 5 as described above. , and the concentration lines are displayed at a density of D2. As the temporary stop suggesting effect progresses, the pseudo continuous symbols approach the temporary stop position, and at the center of the image display device 5 (temporary stop position of the decorative symbol), the speed V1 is applied from above to below. A pseudo-continuous design (pseudo-continuous design drawn with image data 3) different from the pseudo-continuous design (pseudo-continuous design drawn with image data 2) moving with is displayed, suggesting a temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous design. be.

Then, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. The effect image for is displayed, and the second movable body 193SG033 that has moved from the retracted position to the first effect position is colored according to the number of temporary stops (pseudo consecutive times) (blue for the first temporary stop, blue for the second It emits light in green when it is temporarily stopped, and in red when it is temporarily stopped for the third time. Also, at this time, the concentration lines displayed on the image display device 5 are no longer displayed.

On the other hand, when the decorative symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. (Pseudo-continuous pattern drawn with image data 3) is hidden, and the pseudo-consecutive pattern (pseudo-continuous pattern drawn with image data 2), which had been moving from top to bottom at speed V1, is hidden. It passes through the temporary stop position at a speed of V2, moves downward on the image display device 5, and disappears. At the same time, moving display of normal decorative patterns is performed from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 (variable display is performed).

The concentration lines displayed on the image display device 5 change in density from D2 to D1 (the number of displayed concentration lines decreases) from the timing when the pseudo continuous pattern starts to move at the speed V2. Then, the concentration lines after the density has changed to D1 are not displayed after a certain period of time after the pseudo continuous pattern is not displayed on the image display device 5 .

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 19-44 (F) and 19-44 (G), after the concentrated line is hidden, the decoration except for the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C for a while. After the variable display is executed in the pattern, the ready-to-win effect is executed according to the variation pattern, and finally the decorative pattern indicating the big hit or the loss is derived and displayed. In the decorative pattern display area 5C, the decorative patterns of numbers other than "1" which is a winning combination or "1" which is a losing combination are stopped). That is, in the case where the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped in the temporary stop suggestion effect, the display of the concentration line continues even after the pseudo consecutive symbols are hidden from the image display device 5, but the concentration line is not displayed. The display is hidden before the decorative symbols stop with a combination of a big hit or a loss (more precisely, before the ready-to-win effect is started).

As described above, regarding the variable display when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. During the temporary stop suggesting effect period, the visibility of the displayed decoration pattern becomes lower than before the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed (visibility: low) because the concentration lines are displayed at a density of D1. . In addition, the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the “right” and “left” decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) are further reduced in visibility (visual recognition gender: medium).

In addition, for the left and right decorative symbols during the temporary stop notification effect period, an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed around the pseudo continuous symbol from the start timing of the temporary stop notification effect (temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous symbol). Visibility is higher than during the temporary stop suggestion production period (visibility: medium).

In addition, after the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 during the temporary stop notification effect period, during the remaining temporary stop notification effect period (player side of the pseudo continuous symbol) It becomes invisible to the player during the moving display toward ) and the re-variable display notification effect period.

Then, from the start timing of the variable display start frequency notification effect, the left and right decoration patterns are displayed again on the image display device. At this time, these left and right decorative patterns are displayed in the center of the image display device 5, such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc., by partially overlapping to provide a temporary stop notification effect. It has the same visibility (visibility: medium) as immediately after the start of

After that, the left and right decorative patterns are displayed in an enlarged manner (moving and displayed toward the player side) such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc., so that they cannot be visually recognized by the player. After that, the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. is switched to a small display in the upper left part of the image display device 5, so that the visibility is the highest (visibility: high). becomes.

19-36 to 19-37, 19-39 to 19-40, and 19-42 to 19-43, the execution period of the temporary stop notification effect and the Although the execution period of the re-variable display notification effect is different (the re-variable display notification effect is executed after the execution of the temporary stop notification effect) is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. The execution period of the stop notification effect and the execution period of the re-variable display notification effect may partially overlap. For example, as shown in FIGS. 19-36 and 19-37, when the pseudo-continuous pattern explodes and is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect, a part of the pseudo-continuous pattern ( For example, the character "E") is erased after being displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, while the character as a re-variable display notification effect on the back side of a part of the pseudo continuous pattern to start displaying the image of By doing so, the image of the character is gradually made visible to the player in the process of erasing the pseudo-continuous symbols, thereby improving the production effect. Therefore, it is possible to perform the transition of the image that is being displayed without a sense of incompatibility.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-35(H), etc., in the present characteristic portion 193SG, as a temporary stop notification effect, the image display device 5 displays an image with cracks in the pseudo consecutive symbols, and the image itself explodes. Although the form of display has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image with cracks and the image with explosion may be different images. For example, as a temporary stop notification effect, after displaying an image in which cracks appear in the pseudo consecutive symbols on the image display device 5, an image in which smoke or light is generated from these cracks is displayed. Then, the simulated consecutive symbols are made difficult for the player to see by the image of the smoke or light, and an image of explosion may be displayed instead of the simulated consecutive symbols. By doing so, it is also possible to shift the image displayed on the image display device 5 without a sense of discomfort.

Next, when the execution of the special temporary stop notification effect is determined at the start of the variable display, as shown in FIGS. Reach. Then, as the first temporary stop suggesting effect, the moving display of the pseudo-continuous symbols indicating the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is executed at a lower speed (speed V1) than usual in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Simultaneously with the termination of the temporary stop replay period, the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect.

As shown in FIGS. 19-46 (D) to 19-46 (H), when the output of the temporary stop notification sound is completed, the display of the first special background image is started on the image display device 5, and the first special background image is displayed. The re-variable display of the decoration pattern of is started. At this time, when execution of cut-in notice effect and group notice effect is determined at the start of variable display, these cut-in notice effect and group notice effect are executed overlapping with re-variable display notification effect.

Then, when the cut-in effect and the group advance notice effect are completed, the first second variable display start frequency notification effect is executed without executing the first variable display start frequency notification effect.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 19-47 (I) to 19-47 (N), the first special background displayed on the image display device 5 by executing the temporary stop of the second decorative pattern While the image is displayed on the second special background image, the re-variable display of the decorative pattern, the cut-in notice effect, the group notice effect, and the second second variable display start number notification effect are executed, and the third decorative pattern is displayed. By executing the temporary stop, the second special background image displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed on the third special background image, and the re-variable display of the decoration pattern, the cut-in notice effect, the group notice effect, A third second variable display start count notification effect is executed. Then, the ready-to-win effect is executed and the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit or a loss.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 19-33 and 19-34, as a temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays concentration lines at the density D1. After the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by this, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying the concentrated lines at a density of D2, so that the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed by the temporary stop suggestion effect. It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the temporary stop. As the temporary stop notification effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped by displaying the effect image for the temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative symbols invisible. It can increase the feeling of exaltation for

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the concentration line continues even after the pseudo continuous symbols are hidden on the image display device 5. Therefore, when the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the continuous display of the concentration line is continued even after the timing when the pseudo continuous symbols are supposed to be temporarily stopped, so that the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. The player can easily recognize that the pseudo-continuous symbols did not stop temporarily, and the player's disappointment caused by the fact that the pseudo-continuous symbols did not temporarily stop can be alleviated, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19-33, when the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the concentrated lines are displayed at the density D2 before the display image data switching timing. Later, since the concentrated lines are displayed with the density D1, the visibility of the left and right decoration patterns is higher after the switching timing of the display image data than before the switching timing of the display image data. In other words, after the timing of switching the display image data, by increasing the transparency of the concentration lines, the player is made to recognize that the pseudo-continuous symbols will not temporarily stop, and attention to the background image is increased through the concentration lines. As a result, the player's disappointment over the fact that the pseudo-continuous symbols did not temporarily stop can be alleviated.

In addition, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion production, before the decorative pattern of the combination that becomes a big hit or loses in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C together with the left and right decorative patterns is stopped. Since the concentration line is hidden at the end, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the stop of the decoration pattern after the temporary stop of the pseudo continuous pattern is the temporary stop.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19-35(G) to 19-35(H), when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, Since the image display device 5 displays an image in which the pseudo consecutive symbols are cracked and exploded (an image in which the pseudo consecutive symbols move toward the player), the operation of the second movable body 193SG033 and the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed. The player can be further impressed that the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped by the display of the explosion.

In particular, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position as a temporary stop notification effect. Since a part of the second movable body 193SG033 overlaps, the second movable body 193SG033 prevents the pseudo consecutive symbols from becoming difficult for the player to visually recognize, and informs the player that the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped. can impress.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, as an example of deformation of the pseudo-continuous pattern, a mode in which the pseudo-continuous pattern explodes is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the pseudo-continuous pattern may change to a specific shape (for example, a circle or triangle), or the size of the pseudo-continuous pattern may be different from that before the temporary stop.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, when the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the retracted position to the first effect position, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, in addition to or instead of the second movable body 193SG033, the movable body 32 is moved to the first effect position or a position different from the first effect position, when viewed from the front. may be moved to a position overlapping at least part of the pseudo-continuous pattern.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19-35 (F) and 19-35 (G), in the temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 is moved before the pseudo continuous symbol is hidden on the image display device 5. Since the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the first effect position to the retracted position, the player can easily recognize that the pseudo consecutive symbols are hidden from the image display device 5 by the movement of the second movable body 193SG033.

Further, in the variable display of the characteristic portion 193SG, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed up to three times. The image display device 5 displays "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. according to the number of re-variable displays as the 1-variable display start number notification effect. Further, as shown in FIG. 19-37(O), when the first variable display start count notification effect is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and Since some of the displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" are overlapped when viewed from the front, "x2", "x3", Attention can be drawn to the display of "x4" or the like, and the performance effect can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 19-37 (O), 19-40 (f), and 19-43 (s), the second movable The first variable display start count is obtained by making the body 193SG033 emit light in blue, the second movable body 193SG033 in green when displaying "x3", and the second movable body 193SG033 in red when displaying "x4". It is possible to prompt the player's attention to the display of the notification effect, and improve the effect of the effect.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 193SG, when the first variable display start count notification effect is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first effect position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and "x2", " Although a part of the display such as "x3" and "x4" is overlapped when viewed from the front, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first variable display start count notification effect is executed. Sometimes, the display of the second movable body 193SG033 and "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. may completely overlap.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19-33, 19-35, and 19-44, as the temporary stop suggesting performance, a pseudo continuous pattern as a temporary stop suggesting image is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5, and a central line is displayed. is displayed, the display control of the temporary stop suggestion effect by the effect control CPU 120 is facilitated, and when the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image data is switched at the display image data switching timing (shown in FIG. 19-3 It is possible to prevent the switching from the image data to the image data shown in FIG. 19-4 from becoming unnatural. Especially after the display image data switching timing, since the pseudo-continuous pattern moves downward from the central portion of the image display device 5, the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5 in advance as a temporary stop suggesting image. By doing so, it is possible to switch the image data at the switching timing of the display image data in a different and natural manner that makes the player feel even more uncomfortable.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this characteristic portion 193SG, the effect control CPU 120 is drawn as image data 1, image data 2, image data 3, and image data 4, as shown in FIGS. 19-3 and 19-4. An image can be displayed on the image display device 5 by synthesizing the data. In particular, a pseudo-continuous pattern as a temporarily stopped image is drawn as image data 1 with the highest display priority, and decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns are drawn as image data 2 with a display priority lower than that of image data 1. Since the concentration line as the stop suggesting effect is drawn as the image data 4 with the lowest display priority, the decorative pattern and the pseudo continuous pattern during the moving display (during the variable display), the pseudo continuous pattern as the temporary stop suggesting image, the temporary It is possible to increase the degree of freedom of concentration lines as a stop-suggestion effect.

Further, in the characteristic portion 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 19-35(H), 19-36(I), and 19-36(J), a pseudo continuous symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When it explodes and moves to the front side, while the left and right decorative patterns are invisible to the player, as shown in FIG. When "x2" or the like is displayed on the image display device 5, the left and right decorative patterns are visible to the player, so the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect (especially (display of "x2", etc.) can be heightened, and the left and right decoration patterns can be visually recognized by the player during the first variable display start number informing performance, so that the re-variable display is executed. can be easily recognized by the player.

19-35 (H), FIG. 19-36 (I), FIG. 19-36 (J), etc., where the pseudo consecutive symbols are exploded and displayed, and FIG. 19-37 (O), 19-37(P), etc., where displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" are moved and displayed are moving displays (enlarged displays) toward the player side. ), the effects of the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start frequency notification effect can be enhanced by these moving displays directed toward the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-33, in the case where the simulated continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the simulated continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is V1, but the simulated continuous pattern after the display image data switching timing is V1. Since the moving speed of the continuous symbols is V3, the player determines whether the timing before or after the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbols temporarily stop (before the display image data switching timing) depends on the moving speed of the pseudo continuous symbols. later) can be easily grasped by the player.

In this characteristic portion 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbols do not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbols before the display image data switching timing is the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbols after the display image data switching timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be faster than the moving speed of the pattern.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-34, when the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the timing of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern is V1, but the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. Since the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbols after the timing is V2, the moving display of the pseudo-continuous symbols can be performed before or after the temporary stop depending on the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbols. can be easily understood.

In particular, in the present characteristic portion 193SG, as shown in FIGS. 19-34 and 19-35, the pseudo consecutive symbols before the temporary stop move downward from above, but the pseudo consecutive symbols after the temporary stop Since it moves toward the side (front side), it is possible for the player to more easily understand whether it is before the temporary stop or after the temporary stop depending on the moving direction of the pseudo consecutive symbols. Misidentification can be prevented.

In this characterizing portion 193SG, an example is given in which the moving direction of the pseudo consecutive symbols differs before and after the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this. The moving direction of the pseudo continuous symbols may be the same before and after the continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. Further, if the direction of movement of the pseudo-continuous symbols after the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols is different from the direction of movement of the pseudo-continuous symbols before the temporary stop, the movement does not have to be toward the player side (front side). good.

In this characteristic portion 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous symbols do not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbols before the display image data switching timing is equal to the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous symbols after the display image data switching timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case where the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image of the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed before the display image data switching timing. and the number of display frames for displaying the pseudo-continuous pattern after the display image data switching timing may be different. In addition, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped, the period during which the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed before the display image data switching timing (the effect period during which the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed) and the display image data switching The period during which the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed after the timing may be different. In other words, in the present invention, "the movement speed at which the specific effect identification information (the pseudo-continuous pattern in the characteristic portion 193SG) moves differs" means that the number of display frames for displaying the pseudo-continuous pattern is different, and the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed. The period during which the symbols are displayed (demonstration period during which the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed) is also included.

Although the characteristic portion 193SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. .

For example, in the characteristic portion 193SG, by displaying a concentration line on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo continuous symbol is displayed in the central portion of the image display device 5 ("middle" decorative symbol display area 5C). Although the form of making the player pay attention to whether or not to temporarily stop has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 193SG-1 shown in FIGS. As shown in (D), the concentration line is displayed on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggesting effect, and the temporary stop suggesting effect progresses (the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed moving toward the center of the image display device 5). ), the central line may be moved toward the center of the image display device 5 and displayed. By doing so, the player can specify that there is a possibility that the pseudo consecutive symbols will stop at the center of the image display device 5, so if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop, the game This makes it easier for the driver to recognize that the driver did not make the temporary stop.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG, a concentration line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggesting effect, and when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, a color corresponding to the number of temporary stops is displayed. , the second movable body 193SG033 (the second movable body LED 293SG034) is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the image display device 5 may display the concentration line in a color corresponding to the number of executions of the temporary stop suggesting effect. For example, the concentration line is displayed in blue when the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed for the first time, the concentration line is displayed in green when the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed for the second time, and the concentration line is displayed in red when the temporary stop suggesting effect is executed for the third time. . By doing so, when the second movable body 193SG033 is caused to emit light as the temporary stop notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 emits light in the same color as the concentration line displayed as the temporary stop suggestion effect. can improve effectiveness.

In addition, in the characterizing part 193SG, the form in which the cut-in notice effect and the group notice effect can be executed as the notice effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. As a modification 193SG-3, as a notice effect, for example, the display mode of the decorative pattern is changed from the start timing of the variable display or the re-variable display timing when the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. An effect or the like that changes the direction of display may be made executable.

In this way, when it is possible to change the display mode of the decorative pattern or change the direction of the variable display as the notice effect, the first variable display start number notification effect "x2", "x In the case where the display of "3" and "x4" is moved and displayed (enlarged display) toward the player side, the execution of the announcement effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from not being able to recognize that the re-variable display will be executed due to the execution of the advance notice effect.

Further, in the characteristic portion 193SG, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 is configured to perform re-variable display without displaying an image that impairs the visibility of the pseudo consecutive symbols from the player. Although the present invention is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 193SG-4, when the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo continuous symbols on the image display device 5 is improved. A visibility-impairing image to be lowered (for example, an image of a blast, etc.) may be displayed, and after the visibility-impairing image is hidden, the variable display may be performed again. By doing so, the visibility impeding image is displayed before the re-variable display is performed, so that it is easy to understand that the re-variable display is performed.

Furthermore, a light guide plate, which is a plate material having transparency and is capable of displaying the above-described visibility-impaired image by introducing light from the outer peripheral side surface, is provided on the front side of the image display device 5 in the pachinko game machine 1 (image display device 5 and the player). In this way, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the visibility impeding image is displayed on the light guide plate to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the pseudo consecutive symbols displayed on the image display device 5. The impression can be enhanced, and the production effect of the visibility-impairing image can be enhanced.

Further, in the characteristic portion 193SG, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop at the central portion of the image display device 5, the pseudo-continuous pattern is always moved toward the lower part of the image display device 5 as it is and is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 193SG-5, even if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo A case may be provided in which the consecutive symbols once start moving downward on the image display device 5 and then return to the central portion of the image display device 5 and temporarily stop. In this case, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing and the movement of the pseudo-continuous pattern when returning to the central portion of the image display device 5 after once passing through the central portion of the image display device 5 By making the speed and the speed different, it is easy for the player to grasp whether the pseudo consecutive symbols are before passing through the central portion of the image display device 5 or after passing through the central portion of the image display device 5 once. You may

Further, when the pseudo-continuous pattern returns to the central portion of the image display device 5 after once passing through the central portion of the image display device 5, the display of the concentration line may not be executed again. By doing so, it is possible for the player to more easily understand that the pseudo consecutive symbols return to the central portion of the image display device 5 after once passing through the central portion of the image display device 5 .

Further, in the characteristic portion 193SG, the pseudo-continuous effect can be executed up to three times during the variable display, and when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed twice. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the maximum number of pseudo continuous effects during variable display 3 times), a reach effect different from the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed less than the maximum number of times during the variable display (for example, the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit than the reach effect of other super reach A high all-rotation reach effect, etc.) may be executed. It should be noted that when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed the maximum number of times during the variable display, even if the full-rotation ready-to-win effect is executed without going through the re-variable display notification effect after the temporary stop notification effect. good.

Further, in the characteristic portion 193SG, as a pseudo-continuous effect, a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in the center ("middle" decorative symbol display area 5C) in a state where symbols indicating the same numerical value are stopped in left and right decorative symbols (reach state). Although the form of temporary stop has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo continuous symbols may be temporarily stopped in a state other than the ready-to-win state. Furthermore, as described above, as the pseudo-continuous effect, a decorative symbol different from the pseudo-continuous symbol may temporarily stop in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. As a pseudo-continuous effect, a decoration pattern different from the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. , and "334" and the like, a combination of so-called shift eyes, etc., the decoration design may be temporarily stopped in a specific combination.

(Description of characteristic portion 225SG in the embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characterizing portion 225SG (hereinafter referred to as the main characterizing portion 225SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. In addition, in this characterizing portion 225SG, the description of the portion having the same configuration as that of the pachinko game machine 1 of the characterizing portion described above is omitted.

The game machine of form 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) for a player,
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying effect images;
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, temporary stop suggestive effect) suggesting that the specific image displayed on the display means is controlled to the advantageous state a part for executing the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 18);
with
The suggestion effect execution means is
a pre-stage effect for moving and displaying the specific image (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 20-4(C) to 20-4(E);
A first post-stage production (for example, as shown in Figs. the part that stops) and
A second post-stage effect, which is a failure mode in which the moving display of the specific image is continued after the execution of the pre-stage effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (F), the pseudo consecutive symbols continue without temporary stop The part that is displayed and hidden by moving) and
This is the characteristic part.
According to this feature, it becomes easy to grasp the success or failure of the suggestive effect, and the interest of the suggestive effect can be improved.

The game machine of form 2 is
In the preceding stage production, a translucent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. is done) and
In the first post-stage effect, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, an opaque effect display is displayed to temporarily make the specific image difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (G) , the part where the effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed),
In the second stage production, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. part),
The gaming machine according to form 1, characterized by:
According to this feature, by displaying the translucent effect display, it is possible to improve the interest of the front-stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being moved and displayed will be statically displayed, and that the specific image is stopped. Since it becomes difficult to see when it is displayed, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity at the time of the stop display and to emphasize that the stop display has been performed.

The game machine of form 3 is
In the preceding stage effect, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. displayed part),
When the first post-production is executed, the specific image is temporarily made invisible by displaying an opaque effect display when the first post-production is executed (for example, FIG. 20-6 As shown in (G), a portion where an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed),
When the second stage effect is executed, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-6 (F), if the pseudo continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the effect part where the image is not displayed),
The gaming machine according to form 1, characterized by:
According to this feature, by displaying the effect display on the background side of the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the front-stage presentation in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being displayed in a moving manner will be stopped and displayed. By making it difficult to see the image when it is statically displayed, it is possible to reduce discomfort during the static display and to emphasize the fact that the static display has been made, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the subsequent stage presentation.

The game machine of form 4 is
In the preceding stage effect, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. displayed part),
In the second stage production, the effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image before the failure mode, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period even after the specific image is erased. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 20-7 (F) to 20-7 (H) as modification 225SG-2, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image is displayed by moving and displaying the pseudo-continuous pattern The part where the concentration line continues to be displayed even after it is hidden by the device 5),
The gaming machine according to form 1, characterized by:
According to this feature, by displaying the effect display on the background side of the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the front-stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being displayed in a moving manner will be stopped and displayed. In the 2nd stage production as well, the interest of the latter stage production can be improved by displaying the effect display for a predetermined period from before the failure mode occurs until after the specific image is erased.

The game machine of form 5 is
In the preceding stage production, a translucent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. displayed part),
In the second post-stage production, a translucent effect display is displayed on the specific image before the failure mode occurs, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period even after the specific image is deleted. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 20-8(F) to 20-8(H) as modification 225SG-3, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the image is displayed by moving the pseudo-continuous pattern. The part where the concentration line continues to be displayed even after it is hidden on the display device 5),
The gaming machine according to form 1, characterized by:
According to this feature, by displaying the translucent effect display on the specific image, it is possible to improve the interest of the front-stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being displayed in a moving manner will be stopped and displayed. Also in the second post-stage production, the interest of the post-stage production can be improved by displaying the effect display for a predetermined period from before the failure mode occurs until after the specific image is erased.

The game machine of form 6 is
In the preceding-stage production, a semi-transparent and highly transparent highly transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that is displayed with priority over the design),
In the first post-stage production, when the specific image is statically displayed, a low-transmittance effect display having a lower transparency than the high-transmittance effect display is displayed, thereby temporarily making the specific image difficult to see. (For example, as shown in FIG. 20-9 as a modified example 225SG-4, an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 20% is displayed on the image display device 5 to display decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns. The part that is difficult to see from the player),
In the second post-stage production, the low-transparency effect display is not displayed (for example, if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion production, the image display device 5 may display an effect image for temporary stop notification. is not displayed),
The gaming machine according to form 1, characterized by:
According to this feature, by displaying the highly transparent effect display, it is possible to improve the interest of the front-stage production in which it is unclear whether or not the specific image that is being displayed in a moving manner will be statically displayed, and that the specific image is stopped. By displaying the low-transmittance effect display at the time of display, it is possible to reduce the sense of incompatibility during the stop display and to emphasize that the stop display has been performed.

The game machine of form 7 is
The first post-stage effect includes an effect in which the size of the specific image is enlarged more than the size in the preceding stage effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. If you do, the part where the pseudo-continuous pattern after the temporary stop is displayed in a larger size than the temporary stop),
The gaming machine according to any one of Modes 2 to 6, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the visibility of the statically displayed specific image, and to further emphasize the static display.

The game machine of form 8 is
The degree of emphasis of the effect display in the preceding stage production increases as the preceding stage production progresses (for example, as shown in FIGS. A portion where the concentration lines are moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5 according to
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 2 to 7, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation for the static display of the specific image, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the preceding stage presentation.

The game machine of form 9 is
An announcement effect execution means capable of executing an announcement effect that foretells that a specific event will occur (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 18),
During the period in which the effect display is displayed in the first post-stage production and the second post-stage production, the execution of the announcement production is restricted (for example, as a modification 225SG-5, the image display device 5, when the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed, the part that restricts the execution of the notice effect),
The gaming machine according to any one of Modes 2 to 8, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect from lowering the visibility of the notice effect and lowering the interest of the notice effect.

The game machine of form 10 is
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestive effect, a first specific image (for example, an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 as a pseudo-continuous suggestive effect) is displayed on the display means, and the preceding stage effect and the first latter stage effect or the preceding stage effect and the above A first suggestive effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous suggestive effect shown in FIG. 20-11(C) as modification 225SG-5) for performing a second post-stage effect, and a display size smaller than the first specific image on the display means A second specific image (for example, an image of an arrow whose left-right width dimension is L2 (L1>L2) as an active display change suggesting effect) is displayed, and the front stage effect and the first rear stage effect or the front stage effect and the first stage effect are displayed. It is possible to execute a second suggestive effect (for example, the active display change suggestive effect shown in Figs.
When the first post-stage effect is executed as the first suggestive effect, an opaque effect display or a low-transmissive effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-11(B), the image display device 5 A portion that displays an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% together with an image as a pseudo continuous suggestion effect),
When the first post-stage effect is executed as the second suggestive effect, the opaque effect display or the low-transmissive effect display is not displayed (for example, FIGS. 20-11(D) to 20-11(F) , the image display device 5 displays an arrow image as an active display change notice effect, but does not display an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0%),
The gaming machine according to any one of Modes 2 to 9, characterized by:
According to this feature, in the second suggestive effect, the opaque effect display or the low-transmissive effect display is not displayed when the first post-stage effect is executed, so the second specific image having a small display size can be understood by the effect display. You can prevent things from getting worse.

First, the display control section 123 in the characteristic section 225SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 can cause the image display device 5 to display a predetermined image based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not to be displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. In the case of controlling so as not to display the image based on the data on the performance screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 which created the display data not arranging the image data of the prescribed image, the prescribed image is not displayed on the performance screen. may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. In addition, for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 4. Among them, FIG. 20-1 is the image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as the temporary-stop suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 225SG, and FIG. 20-2 is the image data when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. FIG. 20-3 shows image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 20-2(A), the image data 1 is an effect image (temporary stop notification) for notifying that the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped in the entire display area of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. This is the data drawn to display the effect image for

As shown in FIG. 20-1(A), the image data 2 moves from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion of the image display device 5 ("middle" decorative design display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect. This is the data drawn to display the saturated line toward .

As shown in FIGS. 20-1(B), 20-2(B), and 20-3(A), the image data 3 indicates that the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. This is the data drawn to display moving display from top to bottom. When the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the size of the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols is larger than that during the moving display (as shown in FIG. 20-1(B), the left and right of the pseudo consecutive symbols The width dimension is a and the vertical width dimension is b, but as shown in FIG. (y>b)). This data is drawn to display a variable display of normal decoration patterns (symbols "1" to "9" in this characterizing portion 225SG) from top to bottom.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(B), the image data 4 shows the simulated images from the central part of the image display device 5 toward the lower side immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the simulated continuous symbols temporarily stopping. This data is drawn to display the moving display of consecutive symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 20-1 to 20-3, these image data 1 to 4 are set with display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5. FIG. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. The display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. FIG. The lowest display priority is set for image data 4 (image display priority in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as the lower image than the image based on the image data 1, and the image based on the image data 3 is displayed. The image is displayed as a lower image than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 4 is displayed based on the image data 1, the image based on the image data 2, and the image data 3. It is designed to be displayed as an image in a lower layer than the image.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. It is to be displayed with priority over moving display towards). Incidentally, since the concentration lines in the characteristic portion 225SG are set to have a high transmittance (for example, 50%), during execution of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the player can see decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols through the concentration lines. It is visible.

Immediately after the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. Based on the image (a pseudo-continuous pattern that has a larger size than during the moving display due to the temporary stop) is displayed with priority. It should be noted that the effect image for notifying temporary stop is not displayed when a predetermined period elapses before the start of the re-variable display.

It should be noted that the transmittance of the temporary stop notification effect image in the characteristic portion 225SG is set to 0%. That is, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 20-2(C) and 20-2(D), the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. As a result, the decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive symbols become invisible to the player, but after a predetermined period of time has passed, the decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive symbols become visible to the player.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(C), the image based on the image data 3 (variable display of decorative symbols different from the pseudo-continuous symbols) is displayed immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the pseudo-continuous symbols being temporarily stopped. ) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (moving display from the center of the image display device 5 of the pseudo-continuous pattern downward).

In particular, in this characteristic portion 225SG, during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbols are temporarily stopped.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) determines whether or not the pseudo continuous symbols temporarily stop at the start timing of the variable display in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect. The variable display is executed by setting image data to be stopped. Then, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped (see FIG. 19-33 of the characteristic part 193). 20-1 and 20-2 in which pseudo-continuous patterns are temporarily stopped are switched to image data in which pseudo-continuous patterns are not temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 20-3.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 225SG will be described with reference to FIG. 20-4.

First, as shown in FIGS. 20-4(A) to 20-4(C), after a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, decorations are displayed in the "left" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5C. The pattern stops (stops swinging) and becomes a reach. After that, as the first temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols move downward in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 20-4(C) to 20-4(E), in the image display device 5, as the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved toward the center of the image display device 5, Then, the concentrated lines are moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5 .

Then, when the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data so that as shown in FIG. 20-4(F), While the concentration line is hidden, the pseudo continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporary stop and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary-stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in FIGS. 20-4(G) and 20-4(H), An effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed on the entire display area of the image display device 5 . Incidentally, since the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0% as described above, the player cannot see the effect image for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period elapses after the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player visually recognizes the pseudo-continuous symbols of a larger size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 225SG, the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5 during the variable display of 1, and the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped. It is possible to execute a stop suggesting effect. Further, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. If the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily made invisible by the above, and if the pseudo-continuous symbols do not stop temporarily as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed as an image without displaying the effect image for notifying the temporary stop. Since the display is hidden after continuously moving toward the lower side of the display device 5, the player can see the success of the temporary stop suggesting effect (temporary stop of the pseudo continuous symbol) and the failure of the effect (temporary stop of the pseudo continuous symbol). ) can be easily grasped, and the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect can be improved.

In addition, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, a concentration line with high transmittance is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby making the player pay attention to whether or not the pseudo consecutive symbols being displayed in movement will be temporarily stopped. It can improve interest. Furthermore, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 displays an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0, thereby reducing the player's discomfort during the temporary stop. In addition, since it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols.

Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbols at the time of the temporary stop are displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop (because the horizontal width dimension before the temporary stop is a and the vertical width dimension is b). On the other hand, the horizontal width dimension at the time of temporary stop is x (x>a), and the vertical width dimension is y (y>b)). A temporary stop can be emphasized more.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 225SG, an example is shown in which the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed in a size larger than before the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped from the timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, but the present invention is limited to this. The timing to display the size of the pseudo-pseudo continuous pattern larger than before the temporary stop is the timing immediately before the temporary stop, the timing after the temporary stop, such as the timing when the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden. It can be timing.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 225SG, the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols is emphasized by displaying the pseudo consecutive symbols in a larger size than before the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols from the timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, emphasizing that the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped by changing the shape or color of the pseudo continuous symbols from the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. You may

20-4(C) to 20-4(E), the characteristic portion 225SG displays concentration lines on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggesting effect, and also displays a temporary stop suggesting effect. By moving and displaying the concentration line toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress, the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped by increasing the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped. It is possible to increase the expectation for the performance and improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion production.

In this characteristic portion 225SG, by moving and displaying the concentration line toward the central portion of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive symbols will be temporarily stopped is increased. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to change the color of the concentration lines or increase the number of lines to be displayed (increase the density of the concentration lines) according to the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect. ), the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped may be increased.

Although the characteristic portion 225SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 20-1, the characteristic portion 225SG draws concentrated lines as image data 2, and draws decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns as image data 3. Although an example has been exemplified in which concentrated lines are displayed preferentially over decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and modified example 225SG-1 is shown in FIGS. As shown in -5(C), by drawing a concentrated line as the image data 4, the image display device 5 displays decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns with priority over concentrated lines (concentrated lines are displayed as decorative patterns and may be displayed as an image on the rear side of the pseudo consecutive symbol).

By doing so, as shown in FIGS. 20-6(A) to 20-6(H), during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the central line of the image display device 5 is displayed at the center of the image display device 5. By moving and displaying toward the part, it is possible to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, and the concentration line makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the decoration pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern. can be prevented.

Incidentally, when the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, so that as shown in FIG. 20-6(F), While the concentration line is hidden, the pseudo continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporary stop and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary-stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in FIGS. An effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed on the entire display area of the image display device 5 . Since the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0% as described above, the player cannot use the effect image for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period elapses after the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player visually recognizes the pseudo-continuous symbols of a size larger than that during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, by displaying the central line as an image on the rear side of the ornamental pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary-stop-indicating effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous pattern will be temporarily stopped. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop can be reduced. It is possible to emphasize what has been done, and to improve interest in the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols.

Further, in the modified example 225SG-1, when the pseudo continuous symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, after hiding the concentration line, the image display device is restarted without temporarily stopping the pseudo continuous symbols. Although the mode of continuously moving downward and hiding has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in H), when the pseudo-continuous symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary-stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are continuously moved downward on the image display device without being temporarily stopped, and are not displayed. On the other hand, the concentration line may be displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time until the stop timing of the variable display even after the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden.

By doing so, as in the modification 225SG-1, by displaying the concentration line as an image on the rear side of the ornamental pattern and the pseudo-continuous symbol, the temporary stop suggestion suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol will be temporarily stopped. You can improve the interest of the production. In the case where the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbols are also displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed on the image display device 5 . It is possible to improve interest in whether or not to make a temporary stop. It should be noted that although not shown in particular, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as in the characteristic portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for notifying the stop, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the modification 225SG-2, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed with priority over concentration lines, and pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect. , the image display device 5 has exemplified a mode in which the concentration line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 20-8(A) to 20-8(H) as a modified example 225SG-3, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, the concentration line is displayed with priority over the decorative symbols and the pseudo continuous symbols, In the case where the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, even if the concentration line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo consecutive symbols are hidden in the image display device 5, good.

By doing so, similar to the characterizing portion 225SG, by displaying the ornamental pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern as an image on the rear side of the central line, a temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. can improve the interest of In the case where the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbols are also displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed on the image display device 5 . It is possible to improve interest in whether or not to make a temporary stop. It should be noted that although not shown in particular, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as in the characteristic portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for notifying the stop, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the characteristic portion 225SG, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed as an image with a transmittance of 0% on the image display device 5, and the stopped pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily visually recognized. Although the form in which it is impossible is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. is temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 may display an effect image for temporary stop notification as an image having a lower transmittance (for example, 20%) than the concentration line.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 20-10, during the period in which the concentration line is displayed as the temporary stop suggesting effect (the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous symbols), the transmittance of the concentration line is high (for example, , 50% described above) allows the player to easily visually recognize decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols through the concentration line, while the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed as a temporary stop notification effect ( In the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous pattern), the transmittance is lower than that of the concentrated line (for example, 20% as described above), so that the player can see the decorative pattern and the pseudo pattern more than the period when the concentrated line is displayed. It may be difficult to visually recognize the continuous pattern.

By doing so, similar to the characterizing part 225SG, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, a concentrated line with a relatively high transmittance is displayed, thereby providing a temporary stop suggesting effect suggesting that the pseudo consecutive symbols will be temporarily stopped. can improve the interest of When the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the image display device 5 By displaying the temporary stop notification effect image in the entire display area, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop, and the fact that the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped is displayed through the temporary stop notification effect image. Since it can be emphasized, it is possible to improve interest in temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbols.

Further, in the characterizing part 225SG, a form in which the temporary stop suggesting effect and the temporary stop notification effect can be executed as effects related to the pseudo-continuous effect during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the variable display, as an effect different from the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect, a notice effect suggesting that the result of the variable display will be a big hit (see FIGS. 19-29 in the characteristic part 193SG) may be executed. . It should be noted that these advance notice effects can be executed when the concentration line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggesting effect, while an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When is displayed, the execution of the notice effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the result of the variable display will result in a big hit by executing the notice effect, and the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5. By restricting execution of the advance notice effect, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the notice effect from being lowered by the effect image for notifying the temporary stop and the interest of the notice effect being lowered.

Further, as a notice effect that can be executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. As a result of the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect, a pseudo-continuous suggestive effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous symbol will be temporarily stopped, and a variable display that is being executed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, the central lower part of the image display device). An active display area 225SG005F is provided for displaying the reserved memory display corresponding to the active display as an active display, and by changing the display mode of the active display, an active display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit, and the active display An active display change notice effect suggesting that the display mode will change may be made executable.

In this way, when the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect is executed as the advance notice effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. is temporarily stopped, an image having a horizontal width dimension of L1 is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 as a pseudo continuous suggestion effect, and a temporary stop notification is given when the transmittance is 0% on the image display device 5. The effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed, and the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is hidden after a predetermined period of time has passed since the temporary stop. In other words, the display of the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect is started at the timing of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol, but the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect becomes visible to the player only when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed. It is from the hidden timing.

On the other hand, when executing the active display change notice effect as the notice effect, as shown in FIGS. The effect image for notifying temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5 from the timing of the stop, and the image of the active display change notice effect (in this modification 225SG-5, the image is displayed from the right part of the image display device 5 to the active display area 225SG005F An image of an arrow flying toward it and having a left-right width dimension of L2 (L1>L2)) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the active display change notice effect, as shown in FIG. 20-11(F), the display mode of the active display changes, and the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the active display change notice effect. It is sufficient that the arrow coming from the right side passes through the left side of the image display device 5 without sticking into the active display, and then becomes non-display.

As described above, in this modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the image display device 5 displays the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect and the effect image for notifying the temporary stop, While temporarily making the image as the pseudo continuous suggestion effect invisible to the player, when executing the active display change notice effect as the notice effect, the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is not displayed on the image display device 5. , By displaying an image (image of an arrow) that is shorter in display size than the image as the pseudo continuous suggestion effect as the image for the active display change notice effect, the active display change notice effect is blocked by the temporary stop notification effect image. It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand.

In this modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the notice effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop notice effect. An image having a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a continuous suggestion effect, and an effect image for temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5 as an example. The invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the transmittance is not 0% together with the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 (for example, the transmittance is not 0%). 20% or 50%) effect image for temporary stop notification may be displayed.

(Description of characteristic portion 225SG in the embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characterizing portion 225SG (hereinafter referred to as the main characterizing portion 225SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. In addition, in this characterizing portion 225SG, the description of the portion having the same configuration as that of the pachinko game machine 1 of the characterizing portion described above is omitted.

First, the display control section 123 in the characteristic section 225SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying images on the image display device 5 . The display control unit 123 can cause the image display device 5 to display a predetermined image based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not to be displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, other image data may be placed in front of the image data of the predetermined image with a transmittance of 0%. In the case of controlling so as not to display the image based on the data on the performance screen, and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 which created the display data not arranging the image data of the prescribed image, the prescribed image is not displayed on the performance screen. may be controlled as follows.

As shown in FIGS. In addition, for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 4. Among them, FIG. 20-1 is the image data immediately before the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as the temporary-stop suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 225SG, and FIG. 20-2 is the image data when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. FIG. 20-3 shows image data when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 20-2(A), the image data 1 is an effect image (temporary stop notification) for notifying that the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped in the entire display area of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. This is the data drawn to display the effect image for

As shown in FIG. 20-1(A), the image data 2 moves from the outer peripheral edge of the image display device 5 to the central portion of the image display device 5 ("middle" decorative design display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect. This is the data drawn to display the saturated line toward .

As shown in FIGS. 20-1(B), 20-2(B), and 20-3(A), the image data 3 indicates that the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. This is the data drawn to display moving display from top to bottom. When the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the size of the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols is larger than that during the moving display (as shown in FIG. 20-1(B), the left and right of the pseudo consecutive symbols The width dimension is a and the vertical width dimension is b, but as shown in FIG. (y>b)). This data is drawn to display a variable display of normal decoration patterns (symbols "1" to "9" in this characterizing portion 225SG) from top to bottom.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(B), the image data 4 shows the simulated images from the central part of the image display device 5 toward the lower side immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the simulated continuous symbols temporarily stopping. This data is drawn to display the moving display of consecutive symbols.

As shown in FIGS. 20-1 to 20-3, these image data 1 to 4 are set with display priorities for displaying images on the image display device 5. FIG. Image data 1 is set to have the highest display priority. The display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. FIG. The lowest display priority is set for image data 4 (image display priority in image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as the lower image than the image based on the image data 1, and the image based on the image data 3 is displayed. The image is displayed as a lower image than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 4 is displayed based on the image data 1, the image based on the image data 2, and the image data 3. It is designed to be displayed as an image in a lower layer than the image.

Therefore, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. It is to be displayed with priority over moving display towards). Incidentally, since the concentration lines in the characteristic portion 225SG are set to have a high transmittance (for example, 50%), during execution of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the player can see decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols through the concentration lines. It is visible.

Immediately after the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. Based on the image (a pseudo-continuous pattern that has a larger size than during the moving display due to the temporary stop) is displayed with priority. It should be noted that the effect image for notifying temporary stop is not displayed when a predetermined period elapses before the start of the re-variable display.

It should be noted that the transmittance of the temporary stop notification effect image in the characteristic portion 225SG is set to 0%. That is, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as shown in FIGS. 20-2(C) and 20-2(D), the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. As a result, the decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive symbols become invisible to the player, but after a predetermined period of time has passed, the decorative symbols and the pseudo consecutive symbols become visible to the player.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(C), the image based on the image data 3 (variable display of decorative symbols different from the pseudo-continuous symbols) is displayed immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect is completed without the pseudo-continuous symbols being temporarily stopped. ) is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 4 (moving display from the center of the image display device 5 of the pseudo-continuous pattern downward).

In particular, in this characteristic portion 225SG, during execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. The player is made to pay attention to whether or not the symbols are temporarily stopped.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) determines whether or not the pseudo continuous symbols temporarily stop at the start timing of the variable display in the variable display for executing the temporary stop suggestion effect. The variable display is executed by setting image data to be stopped. Then, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) controls the image display device 5 at the display image data switching timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped (see FIG. 19-33 of the characteristic part 193). 20-1 and 20-2 in which pseudo-continuous patterns are temporarily stopped are switched to image data in which pseudo-continuous patterns are not temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 20-3.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggesting effect in the characteristic portion 225SG will be described with reference to FIG. 20-4.

First, as shown in FIGS. 20-4(A) to 20-4(C), after a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, decorations are displayed in the "left" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5C. The pattern stops (stops swinging) and becomes a reach. After that, as the first temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols move downward in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, as shown in FIGS. 20-4(C) to 20-4(E), in the image display device 5, as the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved toward the center of the image display device 5, Then, the concentrated lines are moved and displayed toward the central portion of the image display device 5 .

Then, when the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data so that as shown in FIG. 20-4(F), While the concentration line is hidden, the pseudo continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporary stop and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary-stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in FIGS. 20-4(G) and 20-4(H), An effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed on the entire display area of the image display device 5 . Incidentally, since the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0% as described above, the player cannot see the effect image for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period elapses after the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player visually recognizes the pseudo-continuous symbols of a larger size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 225SG, the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved and displayed toward the center of the image display device 5 during the variable display of 1, and the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped. It is possible to execute a stop suggesting effect. Further, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5. If the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily made invisible by the above, and if the pseudo-continuous symbols do not stop temporarily as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed as an image without displaying the effect image for notifying the temporary stop. Since the display is hidden after continuously moving toward the lower side of the display device 5, the player can see the success of the temporary stop suggesting effect (temporary stop of the pseudo continuous symbol) and the failure of the effect (temporary stop of the pseudo continuous symbol). ) can be easily grasped, and the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect can be improved.

In addition, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, a concentration line with high transmittance is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby making the player pay attention to whether or not the pseudo consecutive symbols being displayed in movement will be temporarily stopped. It can improve interest. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 displays an effect image for notifying the temporary stop with a transmittance of 0, thereby reducing the player's discomfort during the temporary stop. In addition, since it is possible to emphasize that the pseudo-continuous symbols have been temporarily stopped, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the temporary suspension of the pseudo-continuous symbols.

Further, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbols at the time of the temporary stop are displayed in a size larger than that before the temporary stop (because the horizontal width dimension before the temporary stop is a and the vertical width dimension is b). On the other hand, the horizontal width dimension at the time of temporary stop is x (x>a), and the vertical width dimension is y (y>b)). A temporary stop can be emphasized more.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 225SG, an example is shown in which the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed in a size larger than before the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped from the timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, but the present invention is limited to this. The timing to display the size of the pseudo-pseudo continuous pattern larger than before the temporary stop is the timing immediately before the temporary stop, the timing after the temporary stop, such as the timing when the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden. It can be timing.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 225SG, the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols is emphasized by displaying the pseudo consecutive symbols in a larger size than before the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols from the timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, emphasizing that the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped by changing the shape or color of the pseudo continuous symbols from the timing at which the pseudo continuous symbols are temporarily stopped. You may

20-4(C) to 20-4(E), the characteristic portion 225SG displays concentration lines on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggesting effect, and also displays a temporary stop suggesting effect. By moving and displaying the concentration line toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress, the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped by increasing the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped. It is possible to increase the expectation for the performance and improve the interest of the temporary stop suggestion production.

In this characteristic portion 225SG, by moving and displaying the concentration line toward the central portion of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive symbols will be temporarily stopped is increased. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to change the color of the concentration lines or increase the number of lines to be displayed (increase the density of the concentration lines) according to the progress of the temporary stop suggestion effect. ), the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped may be increased.

Although the characteristic portion 225SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 20-1, the characteristic portion 225SG draws concentrated lines as image data 2, and draws decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns as image data 3. Although an example has been exemplified in which concentrated lines are displayed preferentially over decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and modified example 225SG-1 is shown in FIGS. As shown in -5(C), by drawing a concentrated line as the image data 4, the image display device 5 displays decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous patterns with priority over concentrated lines (concentrated lines are displayed as decorative patterns and may be displayed as an image on the rear side of the pseudo consecutive symbol).

By doing so, as shown in FIGS. 20-6(A) to 20-6(H), during the temporary stop suggestion effect, the central line of the image display device 5 is displayed at the center of the image display device 5. By moving and displaying toward the part, it is possible to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, and the concentration line makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the decoration pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern. can be prevented.

Incidentally, when the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, so that as shown in FIG. 20-6(F), While the concentration line is hidden, the pseudo continuous pattern continues to move downward on the image display device without temporary stop and is hidden.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary-stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in FIGS. An effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed on the entire display area of the image display device 5 . Incidentally, since the transmittance of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0% as described above, the player cannot see the effect image for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period elapses after the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols. The image makes the pseudo-continuous pattern invisible. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden, so that the player visually recognizes the pseudo-continuous symbols of a larger size than during the temporary stop notification effect. It becomes possible.

As described above, by displaying the central line as an image on the rear side of the ornamental pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern, it is possible to improve the interest of the temporary-stop-indicating effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous pattern will be temporarily stopped. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the player's discomfort at the time of the temporary stop can be reduced. It is possible to emphasize what has been done, and to improve interest in the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbols.

Further, in the modified example 225SG-1, when the pseudo continuous symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, after hiding the concentration line, the image display device is restarted without temporarily stopping the pseudo continuous symbols. Although the mode of continuously moving downward and hiding has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in H), when the pseudo-continuous symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary-stop suggesting effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are continuously moved downward on the image display device without being temporarily stopped, and are not displayed. On the other hand, the concentration line may be displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time until the stop timing of the variable display even after the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden.

By doing so, as in the modification 225SG-1, by displaying the concentration line as an image on the rear side of the ornamental pattern and the pseudo-continuous symbol, the temporary stop suggestion suggesting that the pseudo-continuous symbol will be temporarily stopped. You can improve the interest of the production. In the case where the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbols are also displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed on the image display device 5 . It is possible to improve interest in whether or not to make a temporary stop. It should be noted that although not shown in particular, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as in the characteristic portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for notifying the stop, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the modification 225SG-2, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, decorative patterns and pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed with priority over concentration lines, and pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggesting effect. , the image display device 5 has exemplified a mode in which the concentration line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo continuous pattern is hidden, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 20-8(A) to 20-8(H) as a modified example 225SG-3, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, the concentration line is displayed with priority over the decorative symbols and the pseudo continuous symbols, In the case where the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, even if the concentration line is continuously displayed for a predetermined period after the pseudo consecutive symbols are hidden in the image display device 5, good.

By doing so, similar to the characterizing portion 225SG, by displaying the ornamental pattern and the pseudo-continuous pattern as an image on the rear side of the central line, a temporary stop suggestion effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. can improve the interest of In the case where the pseudo-continuous symbols are not temporarily stopped, the pseudo-continuous symbols are also displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed on the image display device 5 . It is possible to improve interest in whether or not to make a temporary stop. It should be noted that although not shown in particular, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the entire display area of the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, as in the characteristic portion 225SG. By displaying the effect image for notifying the stop, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop.

Further, in the characteristic portion 225SG, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed as an image with a transmittance of 0% on the image display device 5, and the stopped pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily visually recognized. Although the form in which it is impossible is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. is temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 may display an effect image for temporary stop notification as an image having a lower transmittance (for example, 20%) than the concentration line.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 20-10, during the period in which the concentration line is displayed as the temporary stop suggesting effect (the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous symbols), the transmittance of the concentration line is high (for example, , 50% described above) allows the player to easily visually recognize decorative symbols and pseudo-continuous symbols through the concentration line, while the effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed as a temporary stop notification effect ( In the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo continuous pattern), the transmittance is lower than that of the concentrated line (for example, 20% as described above), so that the player can see the decorative pattern and the pseudo pattern more than the period when the concentrated line is displayed. It may be difficult to visually recognize the continuous pattern. It should be noted that although it is not shown in this modified example 225SG-4, if the pseudo continuous symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 will notify the temporary stop as in the other characteristic parts and the modified examples. Effect images for are not displayed.

By doing so, similar to the characterizing part 225SG, during the temporary stop suggesting effect, a concentrated line with a relatively high transmittance is displayed, thereby providing a temporary stop suggesting effect suggesting that the pseudo consecutive symbols will be temporarily stopped. can improve the interest of When the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the image display device 5 By displaying the temporary stop notification effect image in the entire display area, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player at the time of the temporary stop, and the fact that the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped is displayed through the temporary stop notification effect image. Since it can be emphasized, it is possible to improve interest in temporarily stopping the pseudo-continuous symbols.

Further, in the characterizing part 225SG, a form in which the temporary stop suggesting effect and the temporary stop notification effect can be executed as effects related to the pseudo-continuous effect during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 225SG-5, during the variable display, as an effect different from the temporary stop suggestion effect and the temporary stop notification effect, a notice effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit (see FIGS. 19-29 in the characteristic part 193SG) ) may be executable. It should be noted that these advance notice effects can be executed when the concentration line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggesting effect, while an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. When is displayed, the execution of the notice effect may be restricted. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the result of the variable display will result in a big hit by executing the notice effect, and the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5. By restricting execution of the advance notice effect, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the notice effect from being lowered by the effect image for notifying the temporary stop and the interest of the notice effect being lowered.

Further, as a notice effect that can be executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. As a result of the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect, a pseudo-continuous suggestive effect that suggests that the pseudo-continuous symbol will be temporarily stopped, and a variable display that is being executed at a predetermined position of the image display device 5 (for example, the central lower part of the image display device). An active display area 225SG005F is provided for displaying the reserved memory display corresponding to the active display as an active display, and by changing the display mode of the active display, an active display notice effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit, and the active display An active display change notice effect suggesting that the display mode will change may be made executable.

In this way, when the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect is executed as the advance notice effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. is temporarily stopped, an image having a horizontal width dimension of L1 is displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 as a pseudo continuous suggestion effect, and a temporary stop notification is given when the transmittance is 0% on the image display device 5. The effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed, and the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is hidden after a predetermined period of time has passed since the temporary stop. In other words, the display of the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect is started at the timing of the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol, but the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestive effect becomes visible to the player only when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed. It is from the hidden timing.

On the other hand, when executing the active display change notice effect as the notice effect, as shown in FIGS. The effect image for notifying temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5 from the timing of the stop, and the image of the active display change notice effect (in this modification 225SG-5, the image is displayed from the right part of the image display device 5 to the active display area 225SG005F An image of an arrow flying toward it and having a left-right width dimension of L2 (L1>L2)) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the active display change notice effect, as shown in FIG. 20-11(F), the display mode of the active display changes, and the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the active display change notice effect. It is sufficient that the arrow coming from the right side passes through the left side of the image display device 5 without sticking into the active display, and then becomes non-display.

As described above, in this modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the image display device 5 displays the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect and the effect image for notifying the temporary stop, While temporarily making the image as the pseudo continuous suggestion effect invisible to the player, when executing the active display change notice effect as the notice effect, the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is not displayed on the image display device 5. , By displaying an image (image of an arrow) that is shorter in display size than the image as the pseudo continuous suggestion effect as the image for the active display change notice effect, the active display change notice effect is blocked by the temporary stop notification effect image. It is possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to understand.

In this modification 225SG-5, when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the notice effect, the pseudo-continuous symbols are temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop notice effect. An image having a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a continuous suggestion effect, and an effect image for temporary stop notification having a transmittance of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5 as an example. The invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the transmittance is not 0% together with the image as the pseudo-continuous suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 (for example, the transmittance is not 0%). 20% or 50%) effect image for temporary stop notification may be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG and the characteristic portion 225SG, one symbol among a plurality of decorative symbols or a symbol different from the decorative symbols is used as a symbol (a pseudo-continuous pattern) is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variable display result corresponding to the reserved memory display can execute the reserved memory display change performance suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit, and as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern. A case may be provided in which the pattern indicating that the reserved memory display changes (the reserved memory display change notification pattern) stops on the image display device 5 . In this way, when the pending memory display change notification pattern is stopped on the image display device 5, the provisional stop suggestion in the characteristic portion 193SG or the characteristic portion 225SG is targeted for whether or not the reserved memory display change notification pattern is stopped. An effect corresponding to the effect (suggestion effect in the present invention) may be made executable.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG and the characteristic portion 225SG, one symbol among a plurality of decorative symbols or a symbol different from the decorative symbols is used as a symbol (a pseudo-continuous pattern) is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is possible to suggest the ratio of the variable display result during execution to be a big hit according to the background image, and the background image changes as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern. A case may be provided in which the pattern (background image change notification pattern) indicating that the game is to be stopped on the image display device 5 . When the background image change notification pattern is stopped on the image display device 5 as described above, the temporary stop suggestion effect in the characteristic portion 193SG or the characteristic portion 225SG is performed based on whether or not the background image change notification pattern is stopped. A corresponding effect (suggestive effect in the present invention) may be made executable.

Further, in the characterizing portion 193SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs

In addition, in the present specification, a plurality of characteristic portions and modifications have been exemplified as the form of the gaming machine of the present invention. Alternatively, only one feature or variation may be implemented.

For example, in the characteristic portion 193SG and the characteristic portion 225SG, one symbol among a plurality of decorative symbols or a symbol different from the decorative symbol is used as a symbol (a pseudo-continuous pattern) is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is changed by a combination of decorative patterns (stopped pattern). An effect (suggestive effect in the present invention) equivalent to the temporary stop suggestive effect in the characteristic portion 193SG and the characteristic portion 225SG is executed for the stop of the symbol that suggests that the suggestion is possible and that a specific set value is set. It may be possible.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko machine 2... Game board 3... Frame for game machine 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Effect control board 13... Sound control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23...Count switch 30...Battering operation handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Game control microcomputer 101, 121...ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of performance identification information including specific performance identification information, deriving and displaying a display result, and controlling to an advantageous state for a player,
As a variable display, a specific effect can be executed in which the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the effect identification information until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display is resumed. a performance execution means;
a first suggesting effect executing means capable of executing a first suggesting effect suggesting that the specific effect identification information temporarily stops;
a notification effect executing means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the specific effect identification information has temporarily stopped;
a second suggestive effect executing means capable of suggesting that the control is to be in the advantageous state and executing a plurality of types of second suggestive effects with different expectations depending on the effect mode;
a special image display effect executing means capable of displaying a special image;
By using the displayed special image, it is possible to execute a special performance in which the second suggestive performance executed in one performance mode is changed to a performance mode with a higher degree of expectation than the one performance mode. and a special effect execution means,
The first suggesting effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identifying information different from the specific effect identifying information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the first suggesting effect, and then It is possible to execute an effect that lowers the visibility to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the first low visibility state,
The notification effect execution means is capable of executing, as the notification effect, an effect in which effect identification information different from the specific effect identification information is made invisible,
The first suggesting effect executing means can execute the first suggesting effect even when the specific effect identification information does not temporarily stop, and if the temporary stop does not occur, a predetermined period after the predetermined timing The effect display can be continuously displayed,
The special effect executing means displays a special corresponding image when the second suggestive effect is being executed, and executes the special effect in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image. Characteristic game machine. A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of a plurality of types of effect identification information, deriving and displaying display results, and controlling the game machine to an advantageous state for a player,
As the variable display, at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed, the special identification information different from the effect identification information is temporarily stopped, and then the variable display is restarted. a specific effect executing means capable of executing the effect;
a first suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a first suggestive effect suggesting that the special identification information will temporarily stop;
A notification effect executing means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that the special identification information has temporarily stopped;
a second suggestive effect executing means capable of suggesting that the control is to be in the advantageous state and executing a plurality of types of second suggestive effects with different expectations depending on the effect mode;
a special image display effect executing means capable of displaying a special image;
By using the displayed special image, it is possible to execute a special performance in which the second suggestive performance executed in one performance mode is changed to a performance mode with a higher degree of expectation than the one performance mode. and a special effect execution means,
The first suggestive effect executing means temporarily lowers the visibility of the effect identification information to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display as the first suggestive effect, and then lowers the visibility of the effect identification information to the first low visibility state. Furthermore, it is possible to execute an effect that lowers the visibility to the second low visibility state,
The notification effect execution means is capable of executing an effect that makes the effect identification information invisible as the notification effect,
The first suggesting effect execution means can execute the first suggesting effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and if the temporary stop does not occur, the predetermined period after the predetermined timing It is possible to continuously display the effect display,
The special effect executing means displays a special corresponding image when the second suggestive effect is being executed, and executes the special effect in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image. Characteristic game machine.

Images